Quarterlytics / Real Estate / Real Estate - Services / CBRE Group

CBRE Group

cbre · NYSE Real Estate
Claim this profile
Ticker cbre
Exchange NYSE
Sector Real Estate
Industry Real Estate - Services
Employees 10,000+
← All annual reports
FY2010 Annual Report · CBRE Group
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

l

C
o
s
e
B
r
o
t
h
e
r
s
G
r
o
u
p
p
c
A
n
n
u
a

l

l

R
e
p
o
r
t
2
0
1
0

Close Brothers Group plc
10 Crown Place
London EC2A 4FT
Tel: +44 (0)20 7655 3100
Fax: +44 (0)20 7655 8967

www.closebrothers.co.uk

U09509_cover.indd   1

29/9/10   20:47:15

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers is a 
Banking, Securities and 
Asset Management 
group with a long and 
successful track record.

Corporate Overview
01  Group Results
02   Chairman’s and Chief 
Executive’s Statement

06  Our Business
08  Board of Directors
10  Executive Committee

Business Review
11  Overview
16  Banking
18  Securities
20  Asset Management
22   Principal Risks and 

Uncertainties

Governance
27  Report of the Directors
29  Corporate Governance
36  Corporate Responsibility
38   Report of the Board on 
Directors’ Remuneration

Financial Statements
49  Report of the Auditors
50   Consolidated Income Statement
51   Consolidated Statement  
of Recognised Income  
and Expense

52  Consolidated Balance Sheet
53   Consolidated Statement of  

Changes in Equity

54   Consolidated Cash Flow 

Statement

55  Company Balance Sheet
56  The Notes
 100  Investor Relations
 100  Cautionary Statement

Front cover: Close Brothers, 10 Crown Place head office in London (right)

Auditors
Deloitte LLP

Solicitors
Slaughter and May

Corporate brokers
J.P. Morgan Cazenove
UBS Investment Banking

Registrars
Capita Registrars
Northern House
Woodsome Park
Fenay Bridge
Huddersfield HD8 0GA
Shareholder helpline: 0871 664 0300 
Calls cost 10p per minute plus network charges,
lines are open 8.30am to 5.30pm Monday to Friday
Fax: 01484 606484
Website: www.capitaregistrars.com

Registered office
Close Brothers Group plc
10 Crown Place
London EC2A 4FT
Telephone: +44 (0)20 7655 3100
Fax: +44 (0)20 7655 8967
E-mail: enquiries@cbgplc.com
Company No. 520241
Website: www.closebrothers.co.uk

Designed by Emperor Design Consultants Ltd

Typeset and printed by B

U09509_cover.indd   2

29/9/10   20:47:16

Corporate Overview

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Group Results
for the year ended 31 July 2010

Financial Highlights

Adjusted operating profit from
continuing operations
£ million

Adjusted basic earnings per share
from continuing operations
pence

Ordinary dividend per share
pence

2010
2009
2008
20071
20061

121.3

113.7

127.5

172.8

157.3

2010
2009
2008
20071
20061

61.3
60.5

63.7

82.8

74.1

2010
2009
2008
2007
2006

1Continuing and discontinued operations.

1 Continuing and discontinued operations.

01

 39.0
 39.0
 39.0

 37.0

32.5

£121.3m
(2009: £113.7m)
Adjusted1 operating  
profit from continuing 
operations

61.3p
(2009: 60.5p)
Adjusted1 earnings per  
share from continuing 
operations

39.0p
(2009: 39.0p)
Ordinary dividend  
per share

£99.3m
(2009: £88.3m)
Operating profit before  
tax from continuing  
operations

46.0p
(2009: 43.6p)
Basic earnings per  
share from continuing 
operations

£754.4m
(2009: £697.7m)
Total equity

1Stated before exceptional items, goodwill impairment and amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition.

U09509_pp01-pp10.indd   1

29/9/10   20:47:55

Corporate Overview

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Chairman’s and Chief Executive’s Statement

02

Results and Dividend
Adjusted operating profit from continuing 
operations was £121.3 million (2009: 
£113.7 million), a 7% increase year on 
year. Adjusted earnings per share from 
continuing operations increased 
marginally to 61.3p (2009: 60.5p) and 
basic earnings per share from continuing 
operations increased 6% to 46.0p 
(2009: 43.6p).

Operating profit before tax from 
continuing operations of £99.3 million 
(2009: £88.3 million) includes the impact 
of exceptional items of £15.0 million 
(2009: £6.0 million) relating to the 
impairment of two group investments, 
which were impacted by the challenging 
economic environment. Additionally,  
as a result of the continuation of difficult 
market conditions, a goodwill impairment 
of  £6.5 million (2009: £19.0 million) was 
taken in Asset Management.

The group retained a strong capital base 
with a core tier 1 capital ratio of 13.9% at 
31 July 2010 (31 July 2009: 14.8%) and 
a total capital ratio of 15.8% (31 July 
2009: 16.6%), despite 23% loan book 
growth during the period. The strength 
of the group’s capital position ensured 
adequate flexibility to support the 
group’s existing businesses and, 
combined with efficient capital allocation 
across the divisions, allowed the pursuit 
of growth opportunities.

The board is recommending a maintained 
final dividend of 25.5p (2009: 25.5p) per 
share in cash, resulting in a total dividend 
for the year of 39.0p (2009: 39.0p).

Divisional Performance
The Banking division delivered a very 
strong performance and returned its 
highest ever adjusted operating profit of 
£79.5 million (2009: £54.0 million). The 
loan book increased 23% to a record 
£2.9 billion (2009: £2.4 billion). The 
division benefited from the strength  
of its market position across its niche 
businesses and its solid and diverse 
funding model. This has been achieved 
whilst retaining its disciplined approach 
to lending. As a result the net interest 
margin increased to 9.7% (2009: 9.4%) 
and adjusted operating income 
increased 15% to £272.0 million (2009: 
£235.5 million). A modest improvement 
in economic conditions saw a reduction 
in impairment losses on loans and 
advances as a percentage of the average 
loan book to 2.4% (2009: 2.6%), driven 
by the Retail businesses. 

Strone Macpherson Chairman

Close Brothers Group has achieved a good overall 
performance for the year.

The Banking division delivered a very strong result as 
it strengthened its leading position in its specialised 
lending businesses to deliver a record closing loan 
book and the division’s highest profit contribution to 
date. There was a continued good contribution by 
Securities driven by the good performance from 
Winterflood which is a leader in UK market-making. 
Asset Management is undergoing a transformation 
and is positioning itself to become a leading provider 
of UK wealth and asset management services.

The group remains strongly capitalised and is  
well positioned to take advantage of future  
growth opportunities.

U09509_pp01-pp10.indd   2

29/9/10   20:47:57

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

03

“The group is well 
positioned to take 
advantage of 
future growth 
opportunities.”

Preben Prebensen Chief Executive

The Securities division delivered another 
good performance with adjusted 
operating profit of £59.3 million (2009: 
£64.9 million). This reflected an improved 
performance in Winterflood and Close 
Brothers Seydler Bank (“Seydler”). The 
9% reduction in the year was a result of 
a lower contribution from the group’s 
associate Mako which had an 
exceptional prior year performance.

Winterflood retained its position as the 
leading market-maker to the UK retail 
stockbroking industry, trading record 
volumes, with over 46,000 (2009: 
42,000) bargains per trading day. 
However, there was a reduction in 
income per bargain to £11.18 (2009: 
£11.98) over the period. Winterflood 
increased its profitability and recorded 
only four (2009: seven) loss days out of a 
total of 252 (2009: 253) trading days. 
Overall, adjusted operating profit was up 
3% to £48.7 million (2009: £47.3 million), 
a ten year high for the business.

Seydler had an improved performance 
with adjusted operating profit growth to 
£4.9 million (2009: £1.5 million) offset by 
more challenging market conditions for 
Mako. Reduced volumes, particularly  
in the later stages of the year, led to a 
reduction in Mako’s contribution to £5.7 
million (2009: £16.1 million) relative to the 
exceptional prior period performance 
which benefited from high volumes and 
volatility immediately following the 
collapse of Lehman Brothers. 

The Asset Management division had a 
subdued performance for the year and 
reported adjusted operating profit of £3.3 
million (2009: £12.0 million) as the division 
commenced a period of transformation 
and investment for future growth. While 
overall operating income was marginally 
higher at £97.0 million (2009: £95.0 
million) this was predominately due to 
one-off investment gains of £6 million on 
the division’s residual interest in a private 
equity business.

Closing Funds under Management 
(“FuM”) increased 9% to £7.4 billion 
(31 July 2009: £6.8 billion) reflecting 
positive market movements as equity 
markets recovered. The Private Clients 
business achieved a net new funds flow 
of £221.1 million (31 July 2009: £161.2 
million) during the year and 16% (31 July 
2009: 1%) growth in funds overall.

U09509_pp01-pp10.indd   3

29/9/10   20:47:58

Corporate Overview

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Chairman’s and Chief Executive’s statement
continued

04

Strategy
The group is focused on developing its 
three key business areas: 

•	

•	

•	

The Bank
specialised finance in the UK;

ing division is a leader in 

Securities, largely through 
Winterflood, is a leader in UK 
market-making; and

Asset Management
 is investing to 
become a leader in UK wealth and 
asset management. 

We have a clear strategy for each of 
these businesses.

Going forward, the Banking division will 
retain its specialised and disciplined 
approach to lending and seek to grow 
market share without compromising 
levels of profitability and margins. To 
support this growth, the division 
streamlined its structure, strengthened 
its management team, developed new 
and existing product lines, added front 
line loan origination capacity and 
extended its branch network in the UK.

Retail, comprising motor and insurance 
premium financing, is seeking ways to 
grow its existing offering and develop 
new products. It has expanded into new 
geographies with the addition of a 
branch in the South West of England 
and services into Northern Ireland. It is 
also adding to front line staff including 
the establishment of a team focused on 
new car and franchise dealers. Overall, 
this resulted in an increase in market 
share within the independent used car 
market from 5% to 9% over the past 
twelve months. Personal lines continue 
to drive the insurance premium business, 
which now has close to 5% share of the 
overall market and a substantial share of 
the independent market.

Commercial is successfully expanding 
its asset and invoice financing 
businesses through a combination of 
acquisition and organic growth initiatives 
and by investing in sales personnel.  
It is also actively growing the middle 
ticket leasing business and during the 
year, also expanded its operations into 
Northern Ireland.

“The group is focused on developing 
its three key business areas.”

As a result, market share in asset 
financing has risen from 4% to 6%. 
Invoice financing is focused on 
developing its sales team to target larger 
deals and, during the 2010 financial year, 
acquired a £93.8 million loan book which 
is now fully integrated. As a result, this 
business now has around 13% of the 
independent market, up from 8% twelve 
months ago.

Property will continue to actively 
maintain its leading market position in 
residential development lending by 
prudently lending to clients who are 
attracted by its local knowledge and 
development expertise. During the year 
it also expanded its business by opening 
an office in Scotland.

In Securities, Winterflood will seek to 
maintain its leading position in the UK 
retail market place. It will support and 
grow its existing core business, as a 
London Stock Exchange registered 
market-maker in over 3,300 UK 
securities, by leveraging its trading 
expertise and proprietary technology 
platform.

Winterflood will also explore 
opportunities to expand its business 
incrementally in other markets. It will 
seek to capture US and European order 
flow by selectively expanding its 
capabilities and resources into those 
markets. It will also promote its expertise 
to asset managers who wish to 
outsource dealing and execution 
services to a specialist provider. 

In the smaller Securities businesses, 
Seydler is well positioned for the 
development of the Frankfurt floor based 
trading platform and a recovery in equity 
and debt capital markets activity. Mako 
continues to have a strong position in its 
core derivatives market-making business 
and sees growth opportunities in its 
investment management activity, 
predominantly through Pelagus Capital, 
its fixed income relative-value fund.

Asset Management has carried out 
focused research and evaluated its core 
strengths, capabilities and opportunities 
in the external environment and now has 
a clear strategy to create a high growth, 
wealth and asset management business 
in the UK.

The focus of this business will be affluent 
and high net worth investors in Private 
Clients, as well as smaller institutions, 
such as family offices and charitable 
endowments, through the division’s 
Institutional offering. Offshore Banking 
and Administration will continue to be 
focused on trust and administration for 
offshore clients.

The strategy will build on the division‘s 
investment track record; around 
£7 billion of FuM, 22,000 existing clients 
and the Close Brothers brand. The 
Private Clients offering will provide 
advice seeking clients with high quality, 
holistic advice, financial planning and 
discretionary services. It will also provide 
self-directed clients with a range of web 
and telephone-based services to enable 
them to manage their own wealth. This 
combination of services will position the 
business to become a leader in wealth 
management in the UK.

U09509_pp01-pp10.indd   4

29/9/10   20:47:58

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

05

Outlook
The group has made a sound start to 
the 2011 financial year.

In the Banking division, we see 
continued good loan book growth.

The Securities division has made a more 
modest start to the year reflecting current 
market conditions.

The Asset Management division is 
likely to deliver a small loss for the year 
as the investment in the strategy 
continues, particularly in the Private 
Clients business. 

Overall, we expect the group to deliver a 
satisfactory performance for the year.

The Institutional strategy is at an earlier 
stage. The business has already 
consolidated its investment 
management processes including the 
integration of hedge fund multi-manager, 
Fortune. It has also developed common 
multi-asset, multi-manager investment 
propositions to service both private and 
institutional clients, and will invest across 
long-only and hedge funds, structured 
products as well as equities and bonds.

The division sees a significant 
opportunity to service and acquire 
clients from independent financial 
advisors (“IFAs”) who are exiting the 
market as a result of regulatory change. 
During the year the division entered into 
its first agreement with an IFA to acquire 
client assets of up to £50 million. In the 
period since 31 July 2010 the division 
also acquired Chartwell Group Limited, 
an IFA business based in Bristol with 
over £650 million of client assets and 
good links into the South West of 
England.

It is anticipated that the total 
non-recurring investment spend of the 
Private Client proposition and platform 
development, will be in the range of 
£18 to £20 million, of which £6 million 
has been incurred during the 2010 
financial year and a further £10 million 
will be invested in the 2011 financial year.

These initiatives will take time until their 
potential is fully realised. The investment 
will be modest in the context of the 
overall group and is expected to result in 
a significant contribution by the division 
to the group in the medium term.

U09509_pp01-pp10.indd   5

29/9/10   20:47:58

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Corporate Overview

Our Business

06

Close Brothers has three operating divisions:
Banking, Securities and Asset Management.
We derive our revenue from a mix of fees,
dealing profits and interest margin. We employ
over 2,600 people, principally across the UK
and Channel Islands and also in Continental
Europe, Cayman Islands and South Africa.

Banking
Adjusted operating profit  
was £79.5 million. The loan 
book increased 23% to 
£2.9 billion. The division 
employs over 1,470 people.

The Banking division comprises 
four business units: Retail, 
Commercial, Property and 
Treasury focused on secured 
lending across a wide range of 
asset classes, mainly in the UK.

U09509_pp01-pp10.indd   6

29/9/10   20:48:01

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

07

£531.7m

Adjusted operating
income from continuing
operations

£121.3m

Adjusted operating
profit from continuing
operations

£754.4m

Total equity

Securities
Adjusted operating profit 
for the division was £59.3 
million. The division employs 
over 260 people.

The Securities division has two 
principal trading companies, 
Winterflood and Close Brothers 
Seydler Bank (“Seydler”) and a 
strategic investment in Mako. 
Winterflood is a leading market-
maker in UK equities. Seydler is a 
Frankfurt based broker dealer 
and order book specialist. 
Mako is a leading market-maker 
in exchange traded derivatives.

Asset Management
Adjusted operating profit was 
£3.3 million. Closing Funds 
under Management were 
£7.4 billion. The division 
employs over 820 people.

The Asset Management 
division focuses on managing, 
protecting and enhancing 
the wealth of private and 
corporate clients through a 
broad range of capabilities 
in investment and wealth 
management, trust and fund 
administration and banking.

£6.3bn

Total assets

£2.9bn

Loan book

£7.4bn

Funds under 
Management

U09509_pp01-pp10.indd   7

29/9/10   20:48:02

Corporate Overview

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual  Report  2010

 Board of Directors

08

1

4

6

2

3

5

7

8

U09509_pp01-pp10.indd   8

29/9/10   20:48:05

 Close Brothers Group plc
Annual  Report  2010

09

 1. Strone Macpherson
 Chairman
 Appointed a director in March 2003, 
senior independent director in 
September 2004, deputy chairman in 
November 2006 and chairman in 
June  2008. He is chairman of the 
Nomination and Governance 
Committee. He is chairman of British 
Empire Securities and General Trust plc 
and JP Morgan Smaller Companies 
Investment Trust plc. Formerly a director 
of Flemings, chairman of Tribal Group 
plc, executive deputy chairman of Misys 
 plc and non -executive director of AXA 
UK plc and Kleinwort Benson Private 
Bank Limited. 

 2.  Preben Prebensen
 Chief Executive
 Joined Close Brothers as chief executive 
in April 2009 having spent his career 
in a number of senior positions at 
JP Morgan over 23 years, as well as 
being chief executive of Wellington 
Underwriting plc between 2004 to 2006, 
and then chief investment offi cer and a 
member of the group executive 
committee at Catlin Group  Limited. 

 3.  Jonathan Howell
 Finance Director
 Joined Close Brothers as fi nance 
director in February 2008 having 
previously held the same role at the 
London Stock Exchange Group plc 
since 1999. Prior to that he was at 
Price Waterhouse. 

 4.  Stephen Hodges
 Managing Director and
Banking Chief Executive
 Joined the Banking division of Close 
Brothers  in 1985, following eight years at 
Hambros. He was appointed a director 
 in August 1995 with responsibility for the 
Banking division. He was appointed 
managing director in November 2002. 

 5. Bruce Carnegie-Brown
 Senior Independent Director
  Appointed a director in June 2006 and 
senior independent director in June 
2008. He is chairman of the 
Remuneration Committee. 
He is chairman of Conduit Capital 
Markets  Limited , senior independent 
director of Catlin Group Limited and 
a non-executive director of 
Moneysupermarket.com Group PLC. 
Formerly with 3i Group, Marsh & 
McLennan and JP Morgan.

 6. Ray Greenshields
 Non-executive Director
 Appointed a director in November 2008. 
He is senior advisor to Standard Life 
Group PLC. Previously he was  chairman 
of Bestinvest Group,  director of Standard 
Life Assurance Limited,  managing 
 director of Barclays Wealth Management, 
CEO of Zurich Financial Services UK 
and International Life, and  managing 
 director of AMP Financial Services. 

 7. Douglas Paterson
 Non-executive Director
 Appointed a director in July 2004 and 
is chairman of the Audit Committee. 
Within the Goldman Sachs Group he 
is a director of Goldman Sachs 
International Bank, Montague Place 
Custody Services and of Rothesay Life 
Limited and is a non-executive offi cer of 
Generation Investment Management 
LLP. Formerly he was a senior partner in 
the banking and capital markets division 
of PricewaterhouseCoopers.

 8. Jamie Cayzer-Colvin
 Non-executive Director
 Appointed a director in January 2008. 
He is a director of Caledonia 
Investments plc and a non-executive 
director of Polar Capital Holdings plc 
and India Capital Growth Fund. 
Previously with Whitbread and GEC 
and a former director of Rathbone 
Brothers plc.

U09509_pp01-pp10.indd   9

29/9/10   20:48:06

Corporate Overview

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Executive Committee

10

1

3

5

7

2

4

6

8

1. Preben Prebensen
Chief Executive

2. Jonathan Howell
Finance Director

3. Stephen Hodges
Managing Director and
Banking Chief Executive

4. Elizabeth Lee
General Counsel and 
Company Secretary

5. Tazim Essani
Group Head of
Corporate Development

6. Julian Palfreyman
Winterflood
Chief Executive

7. Martin Andrew
Asset Management
Chief Executive

8. Rebekah Etherington
Group Head of  
Human Resources

The Executive Committee has been established by the chief 
executive. The Committee meets regularly throughout the year to 
develop strategy and set business objectives and to assist the 
chief executive with the management of the group.

U09509_pp01-pp10.indd   10

29/9/10   20:48:09

 Business Review

Overview

Summary Income Statement

Continuing operations1
Adjusted operating income 
Adjusted operating expenses 
Impairment losses on loans and advances 

Adjusted operating profit 
Exceptional  items 
Impairment losses on goodwill 
Amortisation of intangible assets on 
  acquisition 

Operating profit before tax 
Tax 
Minority interests 
Profit attributable to shareholders: 
  continuing operations 
Profit from discontinued operations 
Minority interests: discontinued operations 
Profit attributable to shareholders:
   continuing and discontinued operations 

Adjusted earnings per share: continuing    operations2  
Basic earnings per share: continuing  operations 
Basic earnings per share: continuing and 
  discontinued operations 

Ordinary dividend per share 

2010 
£ million 

2009 
£ million 

Change
%

531.7 
(347.0) 
(63.4) 

121.3 
(15.0) 
 (6.5) 

502.1 
(328.5) 
(59.9) 

113.7 
(6.0)
(19.0)

(0.5) 

(0.4)

 99.3 
(32.8) 
(0.6) 

 65.9 
– 
– 

88.3 
(26.1) 
(0.3) 

61.9 
10.4
(0.6)

 65.9 

71.7 

61.3p 
 46.0p 

60.5p 
43.6p 

 46.0p 

50.5p 

 39.0p 

39.0p 

6
6
6

7

 12
26
100

 6

 (8)

1
  6

(9)

 –

1 Results from continuing operations for 2009 exclude both the trading result and gain on disposal related to the Corporate 
Finance division, the sale of which was completed on 1 July 2009.
2 Adjusted earnings per share: continuing operations excludes discontinued operations, exceptional items, impairment 
losses on goodwill and amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition.

Close Brothers has achieved a  good  overall result   for 
the 2010 financial year with adjusted operating profit 
from continuing operations of £121.3 million (2009: 
£113.7 million), up 7%. The Banking division delivered 
a very strong performance with its highest profit 
contribution to date .   The Securities division’s 
performance was good overall, notably Winterflood   
which benefit ed from strong volumes. However, this 
was partially offset by a lower contribution from Asset 
Management as it invests for future growth. 

“The group achieved a good overall 
result for the 2010 fi nancial year.”

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual  Report 2010

11

 Adjusted operating income from 
continuing operations increased 6% to 
£531.7 million (2009: £502.1 million), 
principally reflecting a strong net interest 
margin  and a closing loan book in the 
Banking division at a record high.

Adjusted operating expenses from 
continuing operations increased 6% 
to  £347.0 million (2009: £328.5 million)  
due to increased staff costs in the 
Banking division to facilitate loan book 
growth, and investment in key initiatives, 
notably in Asset Management’s Private 
Client  business.

Impairment losses on loans and 
advances (“bad debts”) as a percentage 
of the average loan book (“bad debt 
ratio”) reduced to 2.4% (2009: 2.6%) as 
the group benefited from  a modest 
improvement in economic conditions    , 
particularly in Retail. The absolute bad 
debt charge increased  6% to £63.4 
million (2009: £59.9 million) reflecting the 
significant growth in the loan book.

U09509_pp11-pp15.indd   11

29/9/10   20:48:26

 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Business Review

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Overview continued

12

There were no discontinued operations 
during the period. However in the 2009 
financial year the Corporate Finance 
division was sold to Daiwa Securities 
SMBC Europe and was treated as a 
discontinued operation.

The board is recommending a 
maintained final dividend of 25.5p (2009: 
25.5p), resulting in a total dividend for 
the year of 39.0p (2009: 39.0p). The final 
dividend will be paid on 19 November 
2010 to shareholders on the register at 
8 October 2010.

Divisional Performance
The Banking division had a very strong 
performance, with profitability and the 
loan book at record highs due to the 
strength of its market position across its 
niche businesses and its solid and 
diverse funding model. This has been 
achieved whilst retaining its disciplined 
approach to lending. As a result, it 
increased its contribution to 56% (2009: 
41%) of group adjusted operating profit 
before group net expenses.

The Securities division contributed 42% 
(2009: 50%) to overall group adjusted 
operating profit before group net 
expenses with a good performance 
from Winterflood and an improved 
performance from Seydler offset by a 
lower contribution from Mako.

Asset Management had a subdued 
performance in the year and its 
contribution reduced to 2% (2009: 9%) 
of group adjusted operating profit before 
group net expenses. This division is 
undergoing a period of transformation, 
with investment focused on the Private 
Clients business.

Group net expenses were £20.8 million 
(2009: £17.2 million). Adjusted operating 
expenses were broadly flat at 
£21.3 million (2009: £21.0 million) 
despite the new senior resources and 
functionality that were committed to the 
centre to assist the existing operations 
and growth of the divisions. However, 
adjusted operating income reduced by 
£3.3 million to £0.5 million (2009: 
£3.8 million) in the absence of a foreign 
exchange gain realised in the prior 
financial year.

The group reports adjusted operating 
profit after exceptional items and other 
adjustments. As part of the annual 
impairment review, combined 
impairments of £15.0 million were made 
on two investments: a long held equity 
stake in Plus Markets Group and a 
seed investment in a European 
investment fund. Impairments were 
taken to write down these investments 
to their market values at 31 July 2010, 
which have been impacted by the 
challenging economic environment. 
The reduction in fair value of these 
investments has previously been 
marked to market through equity.  
In addition, as a result of the 
continuation of difficult market 
conditions, a goodwill impairment of 
£6.5 million (2009: £19.0 million) was 
taken in Asset Management in the year. 
An amortisation charge of £0.5 million 
(2009: £0.4 million) on intangible assets 
on acquisition was incurred in the year.

After these items, operating profit before 
tax from continuing operations was 
£99.3 million (2009: £88.3 million),  
up 12%.

The tax charge on continuing operations 
was £32.8 million (2009: £26.1 million), 
corresponding to an effective tax rate of 
33% (2009: 30%). The tax rate was 
impacted by the non tax deductible 
impairment on investment assets and 
goodwill, which increased the effective 
tax rate by 6% and the post tax 
associate income from Mako which 
reduced the effective tax rate by 2%. 
Excluding these effects, the underlying 
effective tax rate was unchanged at 
29% (2009: 29%).

Adjusted earnings per share from 
continuing operations increased 1% to 
61.3p (2009: 60.5p) and basic earnings 
per share from continuing operations 
increased 6% to 46.0p (2009: 43.6p).

U09509_pp11-pp15.indd   12

29/9/10   20:48:27

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

13

In accordance with the new IFRS 8 
disclosure on “Operating segments”, a 
breakdown of net interest and fees by 
each of the three lending business units in 
the Banking division is now provided. The 
segmental breakdown for the Securities 
and Asset Management divisions are 
unchanged from previous years.

Balance Sheet
Maintaining a strong balance sheet has 
been critical to Close Brothers’ success 
during the difficult market and economic 
environment of the credit crisis. Total 
assets increased 4% to £6,259.6 million 
at 31 July 2010 (31 July 2009: £6,019.3 
million) reflecting significant growth in 
loans and advances to customers (“the 
loan book”). This growth was achieved 
with a corresponding increase in 
liabilities of 3% to £5,505.2 million 
(31 July 2009: £5,321.6 million).

The loan book increased by £547.7 
million, or 23%, to £2,912.6 million at 
31 July 2010 (31 July 2009: £2,364.9 
million). Organic growth of 19% was 
driven by good quality new lending 
across Retail, Commercial and Property. 
The loan book includes predominantly 
secured loans on conservative loan to 
value ratios with an average loan book 
maturity of twelve months (31 July 2009: 
twelve months). In January 2010, the 
group acquired a £93.8 million invoice 
financing loan book which contributed 
an additional 4% growth.

Divisional Adjusted Operating Profit (Continuing Operations)
2009 

2010 

Banking 
Securities 
Asset Management 
Total divisions 
Group 

£ million 
79.5 
59.3 
3.3 
142.1 
(20.8) 

% 
56 
42 
2 
100 

Adjusted operating profit 

121.3 

Summary Balance Sheet

£ million 
54.0 
64.9 
12.0 
130.9 
(17.2) 

113.7 

% 
41 
50 
9 
100 

Change
%
47
(9)
(73)
9
21

7

Assets
Cash and loans and advances to banks1 
Settlement balances, long trading positions and loans to
  money brokers2 
Loans and advances to customers 
Non trading debt securities 
Intangible assets 
Other assets 

31 July 
2010 
£ million 

31 July
2009
£ million

611.2 

198.2

713.3 

728.9
  2,912.6  2,364.9
  1,582.1  2,261.3
107.6
358.4

107.5 
332.9 

Total assets 

  6,259.6  6,019.3

Liabilities
Settlement balances, short trading positions and

loans from money brokers 

Deposits by banks 
Deposits by customers 
Borrowings 
Other liabilities 

Total liabilities 
Equity 

Total liabilities and equity 

597.8 
48.1 

590.7
48.0
  3,115.5  2,919.6
  1,472.0  1,436.9
326.4

271.8 

  5,505.2  5,321.6
697.7

754.4 

  6,259.6  6,019.3

1Includes £452.7 million (31 July 2009: £1.7 million) cash at central banks.
2Includes £54.1 million (31 July 2009: £37.9 million) long trading positions in debt securities.

U09509_pp11-pp15.indd   13

29/9/10   20:48:29

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Business Review

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Overview continued

14

Cash and loans and advances to banks 
increased £413.0 million to £611.2 million 
at 31 July 2010 (31 July 2009: £198.2 
million). Previously, short-term deposits 
were invested in certificates of deposit 
(“CDs”), however as these matured or 
were sold, cash was placed on deposit 
with the Bank of England. As a result, 
cash and balances at central banks 
increased to £452.7 million at 31 July 
2010 (31 July 2009: £1.7 million).

Non trading debt securities, which 
includes the group’s CDs, gilts and 
government guaranteed debt and 
floating rate notes (“FRNs”), reduced by 
£679.2 million to £1,582.1 million (31 July 
2009: £2,261.3 million) as CDs and 
FRNs matured or were sold. At 31 July 
2010, the group had £615.4 million 
(31 July 2009: £754.7 million) of FRNs 
classified as available for sale and the 
aggregate negative mark to market 
adjustment on FRNs was £12.7 million, 
net of tax (2009: £31.6 million).

Settlement balances, long trading 
positions and loans to money brokers 
are assets that relate to the group’s 
market-making activities and principally 
reflect short-term funding of trading 
positions at Winterflood. These 
decreased £15.6 million to £713.3 million 
at 31 July 2010 (31 July 2009: £728.9 
million) and were partly offset by liabilities 
relating to settlement balances, short 
trading positions and loans from money 
brokers of £597.8 million at 31 July 2010 
(31 July 2009: £590.7 million).

Intangible assets were broadly flat at 
£107.5 million at 31 July 2010 (31 July 
2009: £107.6 million) as the goodwill and 
intangibles from the invoice financing 
loan book acquisition in Banking was 
offset by an impairment in Asset 
Management in light of difficult 
market conditions.

Customer deposits increased £195.9 
million to £3,115.5 million at 31 July 2010 
(31 July 2009: £2,919.6 million) and 
include long and short-term deposits 
from corporate and retail customers. 
Deposits by banks were flat at £48.1 
million at 31 July 2010 (31 July 2009: 
£48.0 million).

Total borrowings, which include loans 
and overdrafts from banks, debt 
securities in issue and subordinated 
loan capital, were broadly stable at 
£1,472.0 million (31 July 2009: £1,436.9 
million), including a £200 million group 
bond issued during the year.

Total equity at 31 July 2010 has 
increased 8%, or £56.7 million, to 
£754.4 million (31 July 2009: £697.7 
million) and principally reflects profit 
attributable to shareholders for the year 
of £65.9 million (2009: £71.7 million) less 
£55.5 million (2009: £55.2 million) 
dividend payments and an increase of 
£31.0 million (2009: (£23.4) million) as a 
result of the positive mark to market 
adjustments on the available for sale 
FRNs and the impact of the transfer of 
the impairment on investment assets to 
the Income Statement.

Funding and Liquidity
The group has a prudent funding and 
liquidity position and total available 
funding for the group increased to £5.6 
billion at 31 July 2010 (31 July 2009: 
£5.4 billion) which is significantly above 
the loan book of £2.9 billion at 31 July 
2010 (31 July 2009: £2.4 billion).

The group has a diversified range of 
funding sources with a mix of bilateral 
and syndicated facilities, repurchase 
agreements, a group bond and long  
and short-term customer deposits.  
This enables the group to meet existing 
funding requirements and be well 
positioned for growth whilst considering 
cost efficiency and the availability  
of funding.

Funding Overview

Drawn facilities and group bond1 
Undrawn facilities 
Deposits by customers > twelve months 
Deposits by customers < twelve months2 
Equity 

Total wholesale facilities, including the 
group bond, have decreased by 
£0.1 billion to £1.7 billion (31 July 2009: 
£1.8 billion) as some facilities reached 
maturity and were not replaced before 
the year end. During the year the group 
issued a £200 million bond maturing in 
2017 and as a result the average 
maturity of existing facilities and the 
bond was 22 months (31 July 2009: 
24 months). The average maturity of 
wholesale funding at 31 July 2010, 
excluding the group bond, reduced to 
15 months (31 July 2009: 24 months), 
still comfortably above the twelve month 
(2009: twelve months) maturity of the 
loan book.

The group is supported by a stable and 
resilient customer deposit base which 
increased to £3.1 billion at 31 July 2010 
(31 July 2009: £2.9 billion). Given the 
availability of alternative sources of 
funding, the group chose not to raise 
significant additional long-term retail 
deposits and accordingly, customer 
deposits with a maturity of more than 
twelve months reduced to £0.2 billion 
(31 July 2009: £0.9 billion).

Since the financial year end, the group 
has added a variety of new facilities 
totalling £910 million, with an average 
maturity of 19 months.

31 July 
2010 
£ million 

31 July
2009 
£ million 
  1,458.3  1,409.7 
392.6 
888.8 
  2,869.7  2,029.7 
697.7 

227.0 
244.6 

754.4 

Change
£ million
48.6
(165.6)
(644.2)
840.0
56.7

Total available funding 

  5,554.0  5,418.5 

135.5

1Drawn facilities exclude £13.7 million (31 July 2009: £27.2 million) of non-facility overdrafts included in borrowings.
2 Deposits by customers < twelve months exclude £1.2 million (31 July 2009: £1.1 million) of deposits held within the 
Securities division.

Maturity Profile of Facilities and Deposits

Drawn facilities and group bond1 
Undrawn facilities 
Deposits by customers2 

Total available funding at
  31 July 2010 

Less than 
one year 
£ million 
1,014.7 
112.0 
2,869.7 1

One to  Greater than
two years 
Total
£ million 
£ million
293.6  1,458.3
227.0
8.2  3,114.3

two years 
£ million 
150.0 
95.0 
86.4 5

20.0 

3,996.4 

431.4 

371.8  4,799.6

Total available funding at 31 July 2009 

2,407.0  1,818.5 

495.3  4,720.8

1 Drawn facilities exclude £13.7 million (31 July 2009: £27.2 million) of non-facility overdrafts included in borrowings.
2 Deposits by customers < twelve months exclude £1.2 million (31 July 2009: £1.1 million) of deposits held within the 
Securities division.

U09509_pp11-pp15.indd   14

29/9/10   20:48:29

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

15

31 July 
2010 
£ million 
603.3 
683.8 

31 July
2009
£ million
581.9
651.6
  4,338.7  3,936.8
14.8%
16.6%

13.9% 
15.8% 

Capital Position

Core tier 1 capital 
Total regulatory capital 
Risk weighted assets (notional)1 
Core tier 1 capital ratio 
Total capital ratio 

1 Notional risk weighted assets calculated under Basel II include a notional adjustment for Pillar 1 operational and market 
risk requirements.

Group Key Financial Ratios

Operating margin1 
Expense/income ratio2 
Compensation ratio3 
Return on opening equity4 

2010 
22% 
66% 
41% 
12% 

2009
20%
68%
42%
10%

1Adjusted operating profit on adjusted operating income.
2Adjusted operating expenses on adjusted operating income.
3Total staff costs excluding exceptional items on adjusted operating income.
4Adjusted operating profit after tax and minority interests on opening total equity.

Note: All KFRs exclude associate income, exceptional items, impairment losses on goodwill and amortisation of intangible 
assets on acquisition, and are in respect of continuing operations.

The strength of the group’s capital 
position and its approach to capital 
allocation will allow its businesses to 
grow in the short, medium and long- 
term. The group expects that over the 
coming periods, its capital ratios may 
moderate somewhat as it captures 
opportunities for growth, particularly in 
the loan book, although this is not 
expected to materially impact the overall 
strength of the group’s capital position.

Key Financial Ratios
All of the group’s key financial ratios 
(“KFRs”) improved as a result of a good 
overall performance. The group’s 
operating margin improved to 22% 
(2009: 20%) due to a record contribution 
from Banking and the expense/income 
ratio improved to 66% (2009: 68%). 
Return on opening equity improved to 
12% (2009: 10%).

During the year, Fitch Ratings and 
Moody’s Investors Services issued 
Close Brothers Group plc inaugural 
ratings of A/F1 and A3/P2 respectively, 
both with a negative outlook. Close 
Brothers Limited (“CBL”), the group’s 
regulated banking subsidiary has credit 
ratings of A/F1 by Fitch and A2/P1 by 
Moody’s, both with a negative outlook, 
unchanged from the prior year.

Capital
The group has maintained a strong 
capital position with a core tier 1 capital 
ratio of 13.9% at 31 July 2010 (31 July 
2009: 14.8%) and a total capital ratio of 
15.8% (31 July 2009: 16.6%), despite 
23% loan book growth during the 
period. The strength of the group’s 
capital position ensures adequate 
flexibility to support the group’s existing 
businesses, and combined with efficient 
capital allocation across the divisions, 
allows the group to pursue its strategic 
objectives and future growth 
opportunities.

The group has consistently maintained 
a conservative capital position and 
prudently manages its capital to ensure 
it is comfortably above the minimum 
requirements for the group and all 
regulated subsidiaries.

Proposed changes to the regulatory 
capital regime are constantly monitored 
by the group. The majority of the 
significant changes have been clearly 
highlighted by the regulatory and 
legislative bodies. The group believes 
that it will not be materially impacted by 
proposed changes, based on current 
analysis of the proposals, although 
further developments will be assessed 
as they arise.

Total regulatory capital increased £32.2 
million during the year to £683.8 million 
(31 July 2009: £651.6 million).

Notional risk weighted assets increased 
10%, or £401.9 million, to £4,338.7 
million (31 July 2009: £3,936.8 million) 
reflecting an increase in credit and 
counterparty risk predominantly driven 
by the 23% loan book growth.

CBL, the group’s regulated banking 
subsidiary, had a core tier 1 capital ratio 
of 10.8% at 31 July 2010 (31 July 2009: 
11.0%) and accounted for 81% of the 
group’s risk weighted assets (31 July 
2009: 78%).

U09509_pp11-pp15.indd   15

29/9/10   20:48:29

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual  Report 2010

Business Review

Banking

16

zz

zz

zz

23% growth in 
loans and 
advances to 
customers to a 
record high of 
£2.9 billion
47% increase in 
adjusted operating 
profit to  £79.5  
million, its highest 
to date
Bad debt ratio 
decreased to 2.4%

Roger Stone, David Thom son and 
Mary McNamara  , Commercial.

Bob Golden, Nigel Mottershead, 
and Janet Wilson ,    Retail.

Banking adjusted operating profit
£ million

Key Divisional Metrics

2010
2009
2008
2007
2006

54.0

79.5

74.5
71.7
74.0

Adjusted operating income 
  Net interest and fees on loan book 

 Retail 
 Commercial 
 Property 

  Treasury and other non-lending income 
Adjusted operating expenses 
Impairment losses on loans and advances 

2010 
£ million 
272.0 
255.6 
104.9 
114.2 
36.5 
16.4 
(129.1) 
(63.4) 

2009 
£ million 
235.5 
216.2 
85.9 
99.5 
30.8 
19.3 
(121.6) 
(59.9) 

Change
%
15
18
22
15
19
(15)
6
6

Adjusted operating profit 

79.5 

54.0 

47

Net interest margin1 
Bad debt ratio2 
Closing loan book 

9.7% 
2.4% 

9.4%
2.6%
  2,912.6  2,364.9 

23

1 Net interest and fees on average net loans and advances to customers.
2 Impairment losses on average net loans and advances to customers. 

The Banking division has delivered a 
very strong performance, benefiting 
from the strength of its market position 
across its niche businesses and its solid 
and diverse funding model. It has 
achieved this whilst retaining its 
disciplined approach to lending. The 
division has actively taken advantage of 
the more favourable operating 
environment to extend its leadership 
position, growing the loan book to a 
record high of £2.9 billion (31 July 2009: 
£2.4 billion) with adjusted operating 

profit increasing 47% to £79.5 million 
(2009: £54.0 million). 

Adjusted operating income increased 
15% to £272.0 million (2009: £235.5 
million) driven by an 18% increase in net 
interest and fees on loan book to £255.6 
million (2009: £216.2 million)   . This 
reflected an increase in the average 
loan  book of 15%  and an increase in the 
net interest margin  to 9.7% (2009: 9.4%) 
as the businesses captured demand for 
niche lending services. 

“The Banking 
division has 
delivered a 
very strong 
performance.”

U09509_pp16-pp21.indd   16

29/9/10   20:48:56

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual  Report 2010

Loan Book Analysis

Retail 
  Premium finance 
  Motor finance 1 
Commercial 

Invoice finance 

  Asset finance 
Property 

17

31 July 
2010 
£ million 
  1,201.9 
553.6 
648.3 
  1,162.9 
262.1 
900.8 
547.8 

31 July
2009 
£ million 
995.4 
455.5 
539.9 
882.3 
170.3 
712.0 
487.2 

Change
%
21
22
20
32
54
27
12

Closing loan book 

  2,912.6  2,364.9 

23

 1 Includes £82.8 million (31 July 2009: £96.4 million) Close Finance Channel Islands loan book previously shown separately. 

Banking Key Financial Ratios

Operating margin 
Expense/income ratio 
Compensation ratio 
Return on opening equity 
Return on net loan book 1 

2010 
29% 
47% 
26% 
20% 
3.0% 

2009
23%
52%
28%
12%
2.3%

Top: Frank Pennal and Daniel Joyce, Property.

Bottom: Malcolm Hook, Treasur   y.

Adjusted operating expenses increased 
6% to £129.1 million (2009: £121.6 
million) largely due to significant loan 
book growth and associated investment 
in front line resources and infrastructure. 
 However, the expense/income ratio 
 reduced to 47% (2009: 52%) and the 
compensation ratio reduced to 26% 
(2009: 28%) as a result of strong 
income  growth and overall effective 
cost  management. 

 The bad debt ratio    r educed to 2.4% 
(2009: 2.6%) as the group benefited 
from a modest improvement in 
economic conditions, particularly driven 
by Retail. The longer term Commercial 
businesses  did not see a material 
improvement, while Property appears to 
 have stabilis ed. The absolute bad debt 
charge increased 6% to £63.4 million 
(2009: £59.9 million) reflecting the 
significant growth in the loan book. 

The loan book increased 23%, or £547.7 
million, to £2,912.6 million at 31 July 
2010 (31 July 2009: £2,364.9 million) to 
a record level including significant 
organic loan book growth of 19%, and 
4% growth from the acquisition of a 
£9 3.8 million invoice financing loan book 
in January 2010. 

 1Banking division adjusted operating profit before tax on   average net loan s and advances to customers.  
 Note: All KFRs exclude associate income, exceptional items, impairment losses on goodwill and amortisation of intangible 
assets on acquisition.

The Retail loan book grew 21% to 
£1,201.9 million (31 July 2009: £995.4 
million) with improved margins reflecting 
good demand.  Motor finance increased 
its market share to 9% (2009: 5%) of the 
independent used car market and 
increased the number of car dealers it 
has relationships with to 5,800 (2009: 
5,000) over the last twelve months. 
Premium finance benefited from 
increased volumes, particularly in 
personal insurance lines, with a total of 
1.5 million (2009: 1.2 million) new loans in 
the year. As a result, the average loan 
book increased 14% and Retail increased 
its net interest and fee income by 22% to 
£104.9 million (2009: £85.9 million). 

The Commercial loan book has 
increased 32% to £1,162.9 million 
(31 July 2009: £882.3 million) driven by 
very good new business levels in the 
asset financing business as it invested 
in sales capabilities and infrastructure, 
and an acquisition in invoice finance. 
Excluding the acquisition, the 
Commercial book increased 21% 
although the invoice finance loan book 
remained flat due to the ongoing impact 
of the economic environment on its 
small and medium enterprise customers 
and an active competitive environment. 

Given the 18% increase in the average 
loan book, net interest and fee income 
increased 15% in the year to £114.2 
million (2009: £99.5 million). 

The Property business increased its loan 
book by 12% to £547.8 million (31 July 
2009: £487.2 million) as it continues to 
lend at good margins with the same 
prudent criteria to higher quality 
residential property developers .   
Accordingly, net interest and fee 
income  increased to £36.5 million (2009: 
£30.8 million).

Treasury and other non-lending income 
declined 15% to £16.4 million (2009: 
£19.3 million) as a result of lower returns 
on cash and money market assets.

The operating margin improved to 29% 
(2009: 23%)  due to the strong income 
growth  and  effective cost management. 
As a result of the significant loan book 
growth and a strong net interest margin, 
the return on opening equity increased 
to 20% (2009: 12%) and the return on 
net loan book increased to 3.0% 
(2009:  2.3%).

U09509_pp16-pp21.indd   17

29/9/10   20:48:58

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Business Review

Securities

18

zz

zz

zz

zz

Adjusted operating 
profit declined to 
£59.3 million
Overall Winterflood 
volumes increased 
10%
Seydler 
an improved 
performance
Mako had a lower 
contribution of 
£5.7 million

delivered 

Securities adjusted operating profit
£ million

2010
2009
2008
2007
2006

59.3

64.9

38.7

44.1

48.0

“A good 
performance in 
Winterflood and 
an improved 
performance from 
Seydler.”

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Key Divisional Metrics

Adjusted operating income 
Adjusted operating expenses 

2010 
£ million 
162.2 
(102.9) 

2009 
£ million 
167.8 
(102.9) 

Change
%
(3)
–

Adjusted operating profit 

59.3 

64.9 

(9)

The Securities division has delivered 
another good result over the last twelve 
months. Overall, adjusted operating 
profit declined 9% to £59.3 million 
(2009: £64.9 million) reflecting a good 
performance in Winterflood and an 
improved performance from Close 
Brothers Seydler Bank (“Seydler”) offset 
by a material fall in associate income 
from Mako, relative to an exceptional 
prior year performance.

Adjusted operating income declined 3% 
to £162.2 million (2009: £167.8 million) 
and adjusted operating expenses 
remained flat at £102.9 million (2009: 
£102.9 million).

As a result of the higher profit 
contribution from Winterflood and 
Seydler, the operating margin improved 
to 34% (2009: 32%) and the return on 
opening equity increased to 39% (2009: 
35%). The expense/income ratio 
improved to 66% (2009: 68%) as higher 
volume related costs in Winterflood were 
offset by lower costs in Seydler and 
income growth, excluding Mako. The 
compensation ratio was broadly stable 
at 45% (2009: 46%).

Winterflood adjusted operating income 
increased 2% to £131.6 million (2009: 
£128.4 million) particularly benefiting 
from the recovery in equity markets at 
the start of the year. The total number of 
bargains traded in the year increased 
10% to 11.8 million (2009: 10.7 million), 
which corresponds to average bargains 
per trading day up 10% to 46,730 
(2009: 42,364).

This was a good performance given an 
overall reduction in market volumes, 
which resulted in lower spreads, 
particularly in the second half, and a 7% 
decline in income per bargain to £11.18 
(2009: £11.98). Trading performance has 
remained consistent with four (2009: 
seven) loss days out of a total of 252 
(2009: 253) trading days, demonstrating 
the resilience of Winterflood.

Adjusted operating expenses increased 
by only 2%, in line with income growth, 
to £82.9 million (2009: £81.1 million) and 
as a result adjusted operating profit 
increased 3% to £48.7 million (2009: 
£47.3 million).

Securities Key Financial Ratios

Operating margin 
Expense/income ratio 
Compensation ratio 
Return on opening equity 

2010 
34% 
66% 
45% 
39% 

2009
32%
68%
46%
35%

Note: All KFRs exclude associate income, exceptional items, impairment losses on goodwill and amortisation of intangible 
assets on acquisition.

U09509_pp16-pp21.indd   18

29/9/10   20:48:58

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Seydler had an improved performance 
with adjusted operating profit growth to 
£4.9 million (2009: £1.5 million). Adjusted 
operating income increased 7% to 
£24.9 million (2009: £23.3 million) 
reflecting an improvement in its equity 
sales and capital markets activity. On a 
constant currency basis, adjusted 
operating income also increased 7%. 
Adjusted operating expenses were 
£20.0 million (2009: £21.8 million), a 
reduction of 8%.

Seydler has grown its market position 
with 2,381 (2009: 2,158) specialist floor 
mandates and 184 (2009: 164) 
designated sponsoring mandates.

The 49.9% investment in Mako 
contributed £5.7 million (2009: £16.1 
million) of after-tax associate income for 
the year. Despite higher levels of volatility 
in the later stages of the year, Mako saw 
lower activity as a result of reduced 
market volumes and challenging trading 
conditions, particularly in fixed income. 
The prior year’s performance, 
particularly in the first half, benefited 
from exceptional trading conditions 
which led to both high volumes and 
volatility immediately following the 
collapse of Lehman Brothers.

Mako’s investment management 
business has performed very well in the 
year and Funds under Management 
(“FuM”) of Pelagus Capital, its fixed 
income relative-value fund increased 
$508 million, or 197%, to $766 million 
(31 July 2009: $258 million), delivering 
good returns.

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

19

Top: Jerry Hansford, Winterflood. Bottom: Philip Yarrow, Winterflood.

Key Winterflood Metrics

Adjusted operating income 
Adjusted operating expenses 

Adjusted operating profit 

Number of bargains (million) 
Average bargains per trading day 
Income per bargain 

Key Close Brothers Seydler Bank Metrics

Adjusted operating income 
Adjusted operating expenses 

2010 
£ million 
131.6 
(82.9) 

2009 
£ million 
128.4 
(81.1) 

Change
%
2
2

48.7 

47.3 

11.8 
46,730 
£11.18 

10.7 
42,364 
£11.98 

3

10
10
(7)

2010 
£ million 
24.9 
(20.0) 

2009 
£ million 
23.3 
(21.8) 

Change
%
7
(8)

Adjusted operating profit 

4.9 

1.5 

227

Key Mako Metrics

Adjusted operating profit1 
Tax on adjusted operating profit1 

Profit after tax1 

1Close Brothers share of result.

2010 
£ million 
8.2 
(2.5) 

2009 
£ million 
22.3 
(6.2) 

Change
%
(63)
(60)

5.7 

16.1 

(65)

U09509_pp16-pp21.indd   19

29/9/10   20:48:59

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Business Review

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Asset Management

20

Key Divisional Metrics

Adjusted operating income 
  Management fees on FuM 

Income on Assets under Administration
  and deposits 
  Other income1 
Adjusted operating expenses 
Adjusted operating profit 
Management fees/average FuM (bps) 
Closing FuM 

1Includes performance fees, income on investment assets and other income.

2010 
£ million 
97.0 
52.2 

32.7 
12.1 
(93.7) 
3.3 
73 
7,428 

2009 
£ million 
95.0 
54.3 

37.6 
3.1 
(83.0) 
12.0 
72 
6,839 

Change
%
2
(4)

(13)
290
13
(73)
1
9

Other income increased to £12.1 million 
(2009: £3.1 million) of which £6 million 
reflects one-off investment gains on the 
division’s residual interest in the former 
Close Brothers Private Equity business.

Adjusted operating expenses increased 
to £93.7 million (2009: £83.0 million) 
reflecting investment to strengthen and 
reposition the division during its 
transformation, including hiring key 
resources. In particular, during the year, 
there was non-recurring investment 
spend relating to Private Client initiatives 
of £6 million. This investment includes 
extensive research and marketing, 
proposition, system and platform 
development, and building the 
capabilities to offer a comprehensive 
wealth management service. As a result, 
the expense/income ratio increased to 
97% (2009: 87%).

The operating margin decreased to 3% 
(2009: 13%) and the return on opening 
equity reduced to 2% (2009: 6%).

Asset Management had a subdued 
performance for the year with adjusted 
operating profit of £3.3 million (2009: 
£12.0 million). The division is in a period 
of transformation as it implements its 
wealth and asset management strategy 
aimed at affluent and high net worth 
retail investors in Private Clients, and 
family offices, charities and foundations 
in Institutional. This initiative involves 
investment that negatively impacted the 
division’s profit performance, particularly 
in the second half of the year.

Adjusted operating income increased 
2% to £97.0 million (2009: £95.0 million). 
The most significant component of 
income, management fees on FuM, 
declined by 4% to £52.2 million (2009: 
£54.3 million) reflecting the first full year 
excluding FuM from the private equity 
businesses which were deconsolidated 
in the 2009 financial year. Management 
fees/average FuM remained broadly 
stable at 73 basis points (“bps”) (2009: 
72 bps).

Income on Assets under Administration 
and deposits declined by 13% to £32.7 
million (2009: £37.6 million) principally 
reflecting the continuing negative impact 
on margins in a lower interest rate 
environment and a modest decline in 
deposits.

Funds under Management

Nancy Curtin, Chief Investment Officer.

zz

zz

zz

Funds under 
Management 
increased to 
£7.4 billion
Adjusted 
operating profit 
decreased to 
£3.3 million
Management 
fees/average FuM 
broadly stable at 
73 bps

Asset Management adjusted 
operating profit
£ million

3.3

12.0

2010
2009
2008
2007
2006

32.6

38.2

As at 1 August 2009 
New funds raised 
Redemptions, realisations and withdrawals 
Net new funds 
Market movement 
As at 31 July 2010 

56.6

Change 

1This business area was previously referred to as “Funds”.

Private
Clients 
£ million 
3,349 
583 
(362) 
221 
301 
3,871 

Institutional1 
£ million 
3,490 
507 
(739) 
(232) 
299 
3,557 

Total
£ million
6,839
1,090
(1,101)
(11)
600
7,428

16% 

2% 

9%

U09509_pp16-pp21.indd   20

29/9/10   20:49:00

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

21

Asset Management Key Financial Ratios

Operating margin 
Expense/income ratio 
Compensation ratio 
Return on opening equity 
Net new funds/opening FuM 

2010 
3% 
97% 
57% 
2% 
0% 

2009
13%
87%
57%
6%
0%

Note: All KFRs exclude associate income, exceptional items, impairment losses on goodwill and amortisation of intangible 
assets on acquisition.

The aim of the division’s investment 
management process is to deliver 
consistent long-term growth and risk 
adjusted returns, while managing 
downside volatility. Over the last twelve 
months, the division’s portfolios 
underperformed a 100% equity 
mandate, given its multi-asset class 
approach and conservative stock and 
asset class positioning following the 
significant rebound in markets from the 
low in March 2009. As a result, market 
movements increased FuM in Private 
Clients by 9%, which compares to an 
increase of 12% in the APCIMS 
Balanced Portfolio. Market performance 
was positive in Institutional as well, also 
rising 9%, following good performance 
from the UK equity multi-manager 
business.

Steven Mendel, Private Clients

At 31 July 2010, closing FuM increased 
9% to £7.4 billion (31 July 2009: £6.8 
billion) reflecting positive market 
movements, particularly at the start of 
the year as equity markets recovered. 
Private Clients FuM were up 16% to 
£3.9 billion (31 July 2009: £3.3 billion) 
due to market movements which 
increased FuM by £0.3 billion and net 
new funds of £0.2 billion (7% of opening 
FuM). In the Institutional business, FuM 
increased to £3.6 billion (31 July 2009: 
£3.5 billion) benefiting from positive 
market movements of £0.3 billion, 
partially offset by net outflows of 
£0.2 billion (7% of opening FuM).

During the year the division entered into 
an agreement to acquire client assets of 
up to £50 million from an IFA. However, 
the assets from this acquisition will 
take at least twelve to 18 months to 
transition as individual investors choose 
to become clients of the division.

Since the year end, the division has 
acquired Chartwell Group Limited, an 
IFA with over £650 million of client 
assets, and an established advisory and 
execution only infrastructure, for a 
consideration of approximately £17 
million. This business is based in Bristol 
and will provide Asset Management with 
a regional office in the South West of 
England, and over 60 additional staff 
that will provide extra capability to 
accelerate Private Clients growth.

“The division is in a period of 
transformation as it implements its 
wealth and asset management strategy.”

U09509_pp16-pp21.indd   21

29/9/10   20:49:00

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Business Review

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Principal Risks and Uncertainties

22

Financial risk management is fundamental to the group’s 
activities. The group actively takes on risk in order to generate 
returns for its shareholders. The assessment of the group’s 
appetite for and management of those risks are therefore key 
components of the group’s strategy and day-to-day activities. 
The group’s approach to risk management is outlined in detail 
in the Governance section on pages 33 to 34. Note 33 on 
pages 91 to 99 provides further information and qualitative 
disclosures on the risks arising from the group’s use of financial 
instruments.

Risk Appetite and Reputation
The group has historically operated a conservative business 
model as demonstrated by its resilient performance during 
recent economic conditions. The resilience of the group’s 
model does not diminish the level of importance attached and 
attention given to risk management. The group’s risk appetite 
continues to have at its core a cautious approach, in particular 
ensuring that the group is well capitalised, soundly funded and 
has adequate access to liquidity.

The group considers the maintenance of its reputation 
paramount and fundamental to its future success. The group’s 
risk appetite and risk management framework are designed to 
protect that reputation. This is underpinned by a commitment 
to demonstrate the highest level of integrity in all the group’s 
activities and to treat customers and business counterparties 
in a fair and open manner. Employees are required to 
establish, and are measured and rewarded against, individual 
performance objectives which include this commitment.

The principal risks and uncertainties facing the group at 
31 July 2010 are listed below together with a description  
of the risk, how it impacts or could impact the group’s 
businesses and the measures taken to mitigate or manage the 
particular risk or uncertainty. The list below should not be 
regarded as a comprehensive list of the risks and uncertainties 
faced by the group but rather a summary of those risks which 
the group currently faces and believes have the potential to 
have a significant impact on its financial performance and 
future prospects.

Key risk and uncertainty 

Description of risk 

Risk mitigation and management

Economy and  
competitive environment
Demand for the group’s products  
and services are sensitive to global 
economic conditions and those within 
the UK in particular. Underlying 
economic conditions also impact  
the levels of competition the group’s 
businesses face and their ability to  
trade profitably.

Due to the diversified nature of the 
group’s activities, variable and/or 
volatile economic conditions could 
impact the group in a number of 
different ways. Specific examples of 
how this could impact on performance 
include but are not limited to:

•	

•	

•	

•	

•	

Lower demand for the group’s 
products and services in the 
Banking and Asset Management 
divisions.

Reduced retail and/or institutional 
securities trading activity leading to 
lower trading volumes in the 
Securities division.

Failure of a material institution where 
group or client funds are deposited 
and/or invested.

High bad debt charges within the 
Banking division due to customers 
inability to repay loans and 
reductions in asset values held as 
security for those loans.

Goodwill or other asset write downs 
as a result of lower present values of 
future cash flows due to reduced 
economic activity.

The group’s businesses typically trade in 
niche areas where they have developed 
significant market knowledge and 
expertise. Across the divisions, the 
group aims to be “there when it matters” 
and to build long-term relationships with 
its customers adding resilience to 
trading performance in difficult 
economic conditions.

The Banking business model is based 
on conservative loan to value ratios, 
relatively short-term loan duration and is 
predominantly secured on accessible 
and identifiable assets. The Securities 
division’s primary activity is to be a 
market-maker in short-dated exchange 
traded products, thereby providing 
liquidity to the markets within 
conservative trading limits, rather than 
proprietary trading. The Asset 
Management model focuses on 
managing, protecting and enhancing the 
wealth of private and corporate clients.

Historically the group’s conservative 
model has enabled it to trade profitably 
through economic downturns.

U09509_pp22-pp26.indd   22

29/9/10   20:49:20

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Key risk and uncertainty 

Description of risk 

Risk mitigation and management

23

Funding
The group requires access to funding in 
order to support its client lending in 
particular within the Banking division but 
also trading and growth initiatives within 
the Securities and Asset Management 
divisions.

The vast majority of the funding 
requirement for the group relates to the 
Banking division. Following the credit 
crisis of 2008, access to credit markets 
has become more uncertain. Inability to 
source sufficient funding could 
constrain growth and in extreme 
circumstances require the Banking 
division to reduce lending levels.

Liquidity
The group requires sufficient liquid 
resources to ensure it is able to meet 
liabilities as they fall due.

The group’s ability to pursue its 
strategic objectives is constrained  
in the event of a lack of available 
liquid resources.

Counterparty risk
The failure or default of one or more 
financial institutions could materially 
impact the financial position of the 
group.

The group places material amounts of 
its customer deposits and client monies 
and assets with other financial 
institutions either by purchasing CDs 
and FRNs or by placing funds on 
deposit. The group also enters into 
derivative contracts in order to hedge 
interest rate and foreign exchange 
exposures with counterparties creating 
an exposure throughout the life of those 
contracts. In addition the securities 
businesses trade securities and rely on 
counterparties. As such, the group is at 
risk of financial loss if one of its 
counterparties defaults or fails.

The group remains soundly funded  
with access to total funding of £5.6 
billion at 31 July 2010 and funding a loan 
book of £2.9 billion. Since the banking 
crisis, the group has diversified its 
sources of funding and currently utilises 
the following:

•	

;
Shareholder funds

•	

;
Public bond markets

•	

;
Wholesale facilities

•	

Term retail deposits

; and

•	

.
Short dated customer deposits

Although the cost and availability of 
these sources continues to be volatile, 
the group is confident it will be able to 
access sufficient funding to support its 
operations.

The group’s policy continues to be to 
manage its liquidity to ensure liabilities are 
met as they fall due. The Banking division 
has historically maintained longer maturity 
funding, aiming to “borrow long and lend 
short.” While this positive duration 
mismatch has narrowed in the current 
year, it remains a significant strength of 
the Banking model when compared to 
peers in the industry. The group’s total 
funding at 31 July 2010 is significantly 
in excess of its customer loans and 
advances. The excess is invested in 
assets such as FRNs, short-term CDs 
and gilts, or placed on deposit at the 
Bank of England. The group is currently 
assessing the new requirements of its 
principal regulator under the Internal 
Liquidity Assessment regime, which it 
does not expect to materially impact the 
group’s earnings.

The Risk and Compliance Committee 
within the Banking division monitors the 
credit quality of the counterparties with 
whom the group places deposits or 
whose debt securities are held, within 
approved limits. The Securities division 
exposure is limited as the businesses 
trade in the cash markets with regulated 
counterparties on a delivery versus 
payment basis such that any credit 
exposure is limited to price movements in 
the underlying securities. Counterparty 
exposure and settlement failure 
monitoring controls are in place. The 
Asset Management Risk and 
Compliance Committee maintains an 
approved list of banks and custodians for 
client money and assets which it controls.

U09509_pp22-pp26.indd   23

29/9/10   20:49:20

Business Review

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Principal Risks and Uncertainties continued

24

Key risk and uncertainty 

Description of risk 

Risk mitigation and management

The group’s lending businesses have a 
dual approach to mitigate credit risk:

•	 Aiming to lend to customers with the 
lowest likelihood of defaulting by 
giving due consideration of the credit 
quality and covenant of the 
underlying borrower; and

•	

  Lending on a secured basis with 
significant emphasis on the quality of 
the underlying security to minimise 
any loss should the customer not be 
able to repay.

These are supplemented by timely and 
rigorous collections and arrears 
management processes. In addition 
much of the Banking division’s lending is 
short-term and average loan size is 
small with the result that few individual 
loans have the capacity to materially 
impact the group’s earnings.

The group monitors regulatory 
developments and engages in dialogue 
with regulatory authorities on a regular 
basis and continues to maintain a 
conservative model with a strong, well 
capitalised balance sheet and believes it 
is well placed to react to regulatory change.

The group has a central tax function 
which liaises regularly with the tax 
authorities and has developed a group 
tax policy to ensure a consistent 
approach is taken to tax issues across 
the group.

Credit risk
The risk of default or untimely payment 
of amounts due by customers leading to 
the write off or write down of assets.

The group’s Banking division advances 
loans to a range of corporates, SMEs or 
individuals. Failure to recover the 
amounts lent or the interest and fees 
associated with that loan could result in 
a significant bad debt charge.

Regulation, tax and legislation
The group operates in a highly regulated 
environment. Changes in regulation or 
the basis of taxation, particularly in the 
UK, could materially impact the group’s 
performance.

The impact on the group’s businesses 
caused by changes in regulation or the 
tax system is potentially material 
particularly in the aftermath of the credit 
crisis.

Significant changes to the regulatory 
and legislative environment are currently 
being introduced and more are 
expected. These include:

•	 Changes to the types and levels of 
liquidity banks are required to hold;

•	

•	

 regulatory 

Amendments to the
capital regime including changes to 
the level and type of capital required 
(“Basel III”);

Required enha
ncement to risk 
management and governance 
processes; and

•	

Revisions to the 
Authority (“FSA”) remuneration code.

Financial Services 

Although many of the proposed 
changes are aimed primarily at larger 
institutions, the impact on the group’s 
business model and earnings is 
potentially significant.

The more intensive approach to 
supervision adopted by the FSA  
following the credit crisis, and an 
increased focus on certain issues in the 
securities market, could lead to a greater 
degree of regulatory intervention in 
financial services businesses generally. 
The recently announced changes in UK 
regulatory structure may result in a period 
of increased uncertainty, with the 
potential for disruption of established 
regulatory relationships.

U09509_pp22-pp26.indd   24

29/9/10   20:49:20

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Key risk and uncertainty 

Description of risk 

Risk mitigation and management

25

Operational risk
Operational risk is the risk of loss or 
other material adverse impact resulting 
from failed internal processes, people or 
systems, or from external events.

In common with any financial services 
group, operational risk is inherent to the 
group. The group considers the key 
risks relate to employees and 
information technology.

The group’s success is closely aligned 
to the abilities and experience of its 
employees. The ability of the group to 
attract and retain key personnel is 
critical to the group’s prospects in the 
medium and long-term. 

The group’s activities are highly reliant 
on their IT infrastructure in their daily 
operations. Failure to respond to new 
technology, develop existing systems 
and ensure a robust infrastructure 
could have a material effect either 
competitively or operationally on the 
group’s earnings and reputation.

The group has implemented an 
operational risk management framework 
designed to ensure that operational 
risks are assessed, mitigated and 
reported in a consistent manner across 
the group. The group is also exposed to 
fraud risk both internal and external and 
has continued to review and enhance its 
fraud prevention controls.

The group has implemented a 
performance management framework 
and reviews the reward and incentive 
schemes regularly to ensure the group 
is successful in attracting and retaining 
the calibre of employees necessary to 
meet its objectives, while aligning such 
schemes with risk, compliance and 
treating customers fairly objectives.  
The group has succession plans for  
key employees.

Each of the businesses continually 
invest in its IT platforms to ensure they 
are up-to-date and fit for purpose for the 
markets they operate in. Additionally, 
business continuity plans are in place 
with alternative business locations 
maintained to enable the businesses to 
respond in a timely manner to a disaster 
event. The group’s overall exposure is 
further mitigated by individual businesses 
maintaining discrete IT systems rather 
than group wide IT platforms.

U09509_pp22-pp26.indd   25

29/9/10   20:49:20

Business Review

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Principal Risks and Uncertainties continued

26

Key risk and uncertainty 

Description of risk 

Risk mitigation and management

Market risk
The group’s activities are exposed to 
losses arising from equity or fixed 
income price movements and changes 
to foreign exchange and interest rates.

The group’s securities businesses  
are exposed to market movements 
deriving from trading in equity and fixed 
income securities.

Interest income is a substantial 
proportion of the group’s revenues. 
Movements in interest rates have  
the potential to materially affect the 
group’s earnings.

The majority of the group’s activities are 
located in the British Isles and are 
transacted in sterling. The group does 
however have material currency assets 
and liabilities primarily due to a range of 
currency services offered by the 
Banking division. These currency 
assets and liabilities are principally CDs, 
FRNs and lending as well as 
borrowings and customer deposits.

The group also has a number of 
overseas subsidiaries, a US dollar 
investment in its associate Mako and 
two seed capital investments within 
currency denominated funds.

Senior management within the 
Securities businesses are closely 
involved in risk management processes 
which are also monitored at group level. 
There are controls, supplemented by 
cash limits, on individual large or slow 
moving equity or fixed income positions. 
Real time controls on the size and risk 
profile of trading books and of individual 
books within these are maintained.

Treasury operations do not trade actively 
in money market instruments although 
they are held for liquidity purposes.

The group’s policy is to match fixed and 
variable interest rate liabilities and assets 
utilising interest rate swaps where 
necessary. Interest rate mismatch 
policies are established by the Banking 
division‘s Risk and Compliance 
Committee with compliance monitored 
daily. Returns from the group’s capital 
and reserves are necessarily subject to 
interest rate fluctuations and as a matter 
of policy are not hedged.

The foreign exchange exposures arising 
from the Banking division’s assets and 
liabilities are managed by matching 
assets and liabilities by currency and the 
limited use of foreign currency swaps. 
Exposures are monitored daily against 
centrally authorised limits. The group 
does not take speculative proprietary 
positions in foreign currency.

The group does not hedge its currency 
exposure to its overseas subsidiaries 
and currency investments since it is 
relatively modest. A sensitivity analysis 
on foreign currency exposures is shown 
on page 97.

U09509_pp22-pp26.indd   26

29/9/10   20:49:20

Governance

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Report of the Directors

27

The directors present their report and the audited financial 
statements for the year ended 31 July 2010.

Business Review and Principal Activities
Close Brothers Group plc (“the Company”) is the parent 
company of a group of specialist banking, securities and asset 
management companies.

The principal subsidiary undertakings as at 31 July 2010 and 
their principal activities are listed in note 26 on page 84 of the 
Financial Statements.

The information that fulfils the requirements of the Business 
Review can be found in the following sections of the Annual 
Report, each of which are incorporated by reference into, and 
form part of, this Report of the Directors:

Chairman’s and Chief Executive’s Statement 
Board of Directors 
Business Review 
Principal Risks and Uncertainties 
Corporate Governance 
Corporate Responsibility 
Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration 
Financial Statements 

Pages
2 to 5
8 to 9
  11 to 21
  22 to 26
  29 to 35
  36 to 37
  38 to 48
  49 to 99

Results and Dividends
The consolidated results for the year are shown on page 50. 
The directors recommend a final dividend for the 2010 financial 
year of 25.5p (2009: 25.5p) on each ordinary share which, 
together with the interim dividend of 13.5p (2009: 13.5p), 
makes an ordinary distribution for the year of 39.0p (2009: 
39.0p) per share. The final dividend, if approved by 
shareholders at the 2010 Annual General Meeting (“AGM”), will 
be paid on 19 November 2010 to shareholders on the register 
as at 8 October 2010.

Directors
The current directors of the Company at the date of this report 
appear on pages 8 and 9. All the directors held office 
throughout the year ended 31 July 2010.

Directors’ interests
The directors’ interests in the share capital of the Company as 
at 31 July 2010 are set out on page 44.

Appointment of directors and powers of directors
Details on the appointment of directors and the powers of 
directors are set out on page 30.

Directors’ indemnity
The Company has granted indemnities to all of its directors on 
terms consistent with the applicable statutory provisions. 
Qualifying third party indemnity provisions for the purposes of 
section 234 of the Companies Act 2006 were accordingly in 
force during the course of the financial year ended 31 July 
2010, and remain in force at the date of this report.

Share Capital
As at 31 July 2010 the Company had 149.7 million ordinary 
shares in issue with a nominal value of 25.0p each. Details of 

changes in the Company’s ordinary share capital during the 
year are given in note 23 on page 82 of the Financial 
Statements. On a show of hands, each member has the right 
to one vote at general meetings of the Company. On a poll, 
each member is entitled to one vote for every share held. The 
shares carry no rights to fixed income. No person has any 
special rights of control over the Company’s share capital and 
all shares are fully paid.

During the year the Company issued 194,157 ordinary shares 
of 25.0p each in satisfaction of option exercises. Full details of 
the options exercised, the weighted average option exercise 
price and the weighted average market price at the date of 
exercise can be found in note 31 on pages 88 and 89 of the 
Financial Statements.

Restrictions on the transfer of shares
There are no specific restrictions on the transfer of the 
Company’s shares which are governed by the general 
provisions of the articles of association and prevailing 
legislation.

The Company is unaware of any arrangements between its 
shareholders that may result in restrictions on the transfer of 
shares and/or voting rights.

New issues of share capital
Under the Companies Acts, the directors of a company are, 
within certain exceptions, unable to allot any equity securities 
without express authorisation, which may be contained in a 
company’s articles of association or given by its shareholders 
in general meeting, but which in either event cannot last more 
than five years. Under the Companies Acts, the board may 
also not allot shares for cash (otherwise than pursuant to an 
employee share scheme) without first making an offer to 
existing shareholders to allot such shares to them on the same 
or more favourable terms in proportion to their respective 
shareholdings, unless this requirement is waived by a special 
resolution of the shareholders.

Purchase of Own Shares
The existing authority given to the Company at the last AGM to 
make market purchases of up to 10% of its issued share 
capital will expire at the conclusion of the next AGM.

The board considers it would be appropriate to renew this 
authority and intends to seek shareholder approval to make 
market purchases of up to 10% of its issued share capital at 
the forthcoming AGM in line with current investor sentiment. 
Details of the resolution renewing the authority are included in 
the Notice of AGM.

During the year ended 31 July 2010, the Company made no 
market purchases of its own shares (“Treasury Shares”).

The Company holds Treasury Shares for the purpose of 
satisfying option grants and share awards under the 
Company’s employee share plans. During the year ended 
31 July 2010, 705,411 Treasury Shares were transferred out to 
satisfy share option awards, for a total consideration of 
£4.0 million. The maximum number of Treasury Shares held at 
any time during the year was 5.5 million with a nominal value of 
£1.4 million.

U09509_pp27_pp49.indd   27

29/9/10   20:50:37

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Governance

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Report of the Directors continued

28

Employee Share Trust
Bedell Trustees Limited is the trustee of the Close Brothers 
Group Employee Share Trust, an independent trust, which 
holds shares for the benefit of employees and former 
employees of the group. The trustee has agreed to satisfy a 
number of awards under the employee share plans. As part of 
these arrangements the Company funds the trust, from time to 
time, to enable the trustee to acquire shares to satisfy these 
awards, details of which are set out in note 31 on pages 88 
and 89. 

Substantial Shareholdings
Details on substantial shareholdings in the Company are set 
out on page 34.

Significant Contracts
A change of control of the Company following a takeover bid 
may cause a number of agreements to which the Company is 
party to take effect, alter or terminate. These include the 
Company bonds due 2017, certain insurance policies, bank 
facility agreements and employee share plans.

The group had committed facilities totalling £1.5 billion as at 
31 July 2010 which contain clauses which require lender 
consent for any change of control. Should consent not be 
given, a change of control would trigger mandatory 
prepayment of the facilities.

All of the Company’s employee share plans contain provisions 
relating to a change of control. Outstanding awards and 
options may vest and become exercisable on a change of 
control, subject where appropriate to the satisfaction of any 
performance conditions at that time and pro-rating of awards. 
In the context of the Company as a whole, these agreements 
are not considered to be significant.

Risk Management
The group has procedures in place to identify, monitor and 
evaluate the significant risks it faces. The group’s risk 
management objectives and policies are set out on pages 33 
and 34 and in note 33 on pages 91 to 99 to the Financial 
Statements.

Supplier Payment Policy
All banking, securities and investment transactions are settled 
in accordance with applicable terms and conditions of 
business agreed with the counterparty. Average creditor days 
for all other approved expenses was 22 (2009: 21).

Charitable and Political Donations
The group made charitable donations in the year amounting to 
£281,000 (2009: £154,000). Further details are set out in the 
Corporate Responsibility section on pages 36 and 37. No 
political donations were made during the year (2009: £nil).

Resolutions at the Annual General Meeting
The Company’s AGM will be held on 18 November 2010. 
Resolutions to be proposed at the AGM include the renewal of 
the directors’ authority to allot shares, the disapplication of 
pre-emption rights, authority for the Company to purchase its 
own shares and the re-election of all the directors.

The full text of the resolutions is set out in the Notice of AGM 
sent to the Company’s shareholders. A letter from the 
chairman which explains the purpose of the resolutions will 
accompany the Notice of AGM.

Auditors
Resolutions to reappoint Deloitte LLP as the Company’s 
auditor and to give the directors the authority to determine the 
auditors’ remuneration will be proposed at the forthcoming AGM.

Disclosure of Information to Auditors
Each of the persons who are directors at the date of approval 
of this Annual Report confirms that:

•	 So far as the director is aware, there is no relevant audit 

information of which the Company’s auditor is unaware; and

•	 He has taken all the steps that he ought to have taken as a 
director in order to make himself aware of any relevant audit 
information and to establish that the Company’s auditor is 
aware of that information.

This confirmation is given and should be interpreted in accordance 
with the provisions of section 418 of the Companies Act 2006.

By order of the board

Elizabeth Lee 
Company Secretary

28 September 2010

U09509_pp27_pp49.indd   28

29/9/10   20:50:37

Governance

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Corporate Governance

29

The board recognises and understands the pivotal role  
of good governance not only at board level but throughout  
the organisation. It has been closely monitoring the 
governance debates following the credit crisis and the 
economic downturn.

The board believes that effective management and monitoring 
of risk goes to the core strategic objectives of the group. A 
significant proportion of board time in the last financial year 
was focused entirely on risk, including discussions of group 
risk appetite, the appropriate framework for control of risk and 
the identification and impact of key risks facing the group, 
whether external macro economic and political factors or key 
business risks. Recognising the importance of allocating 
sufficient time for the oversight of risk, it is anticipated that a 
board risk committee will take responsibility for this key area in 
the next financial year providing oversight and advice to the 
board regarding group risk appetite, group risk profile and 
alignment to risk appetite, the risk management framework 
and culture and alignment of reward structures to risk appetite.

Compliance
The directors are responsible for ensuring the highest 
standards of corporate governance within the group.

The Combined Code on Corporate Governance issued by the 
Financial Reporting Council in June 2008 (the “Combined 
Code”) sets out guidance on best practice in the form of 
principles and provisions on how companies should be 
directed and controlled to follow good governance practice. 
The Financial Services Authority (“FSA”) requires companies 
listed in the UK to disclose, in relation to Section 1 of the 
Combined Code, how they have applied its principles and 
whether they have complied with its provisions throughout the 
accounting year. Where the provisions have not been complied 
with companies must provide an explanation for this.

It is the board’s view that the Company’s governance regime 
has been fully compliant for the year end 31 July 2010 with the 
Code of Best Practice set out in Section 1 of the Combined 
Code, except that at least half the board of directors, excluding 
the chairman, were not independent. The board intends to 
appoint a further independent non-executive director to 
address this.

A copy of the Combined Code can be found on the Financial 
Reporting Council’s website, www.frc.org.uk.

The Board
Role and responsibilities
The board is collectively responsible for ensuring the success 
of the Company. It sets the group’s strategic objectives and 
provides leadership for the group as a whole. The board is the 
primary decision making body for all matters considered 
significant to the group as a whole. A formal schedule of 
matters is submitted to the board for its decision, which 
enables the board and executive management to operate 
within a clear governance framework. The schedule of matters 
requiring board approval currently includes:

•	

Setting and monitoring strategy;

•	

Risk management;

•	

Regulatory compliance and internal control;

•	

Ensuring adequate financial resources;

•	

Acquisitions and disposals over certain thresholds;

•	

Board appointments and removals; and

•	

Communication with shareholders.

Matters which are outside the scope of the schedule  
of matters reserved to the board are decided by  
executive management.

The board also adopts an annual schedule of rolling agenda 
items to ensure that all matters are given due consideration 
and reviewed at the appropriate point in the financial and 
regulatory cycle. Agenda items include consideration of the 
annual budget and its approval, review of the Internal Capital 
Adequacy Assessment Process and regular updates from the 
chief executive and finance director on the performance and 
results of the group and the individual operating businesses. In 
addition, senior executives will update the board on specific 
matters, including legal, compliance, risk and internal audit. 
During the year, the board has, in particular, focused on:

•	

The budget for the 2010/2011 financial year;

•	

Funding and liquidity
regime;

, in particular the FSA new liquidity 

•	

Capital management;

•	

Close Brothers Group plc’s bond issue;

•	

•	

The implications of the Turner and Walker Reviews;

The 2010 update on the board evaluation process carried 
out in 2009; and

•	 Governance and risk management.

In addition, the divisional heads of the Banking, Asset 
Management and Securities divisions updated the board on 
performance and strategic developments and initiatives in their 
respective areas.

Composition, balance and independence
At the date of this report, the board comprises eight members: 
the chairman, three executive directors and four non-executive 
directors.

The directors contribute a range of complementary skills, 
knowledge and experience. Details of the individual directors 
and their biographies are set out on pages 8 and 9.

The board is of the opinion that each non-executive director 
acts in an independent and objective manner and therefore, 
under the Combined Code, is regarded as independent, with 
the exception of Jamie Cayzer-Colvin who is a director of a 
substantial shareholder. The board’s opinion was determined 
by considering for each non-executive director whether he is 
independent in character and judgement, how he conducts 
himself in board meetings and board committee meetings, 
whether he has any interests which may give rise to an actual 
or perceived conflict of interest and whether he acts in the best 
interests of the Company and all its shareholders at all times. 
Each non-executive director is required to confirm at least 

U09509_pp27_pp49.indd   29

29/9/10   20:50:37

Governance

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Corporate Governance continued

30

annually, whether any circumstances exist which could impair 
his independence.

Letters of appointment are available for inspection by 
shareholders at each AGM and during normal business hours 
at the Company’s registered office.

The structure of the board ensures that no individual or group 
of individuals is able to dominate the decision-making process.

Biographies for all the directors are set out on page 9.

Chairman and chief executive
The roles of the chairman and chief executive are separate and 
there is a clear division of responsibilities between the two 
roles. In accordance with the Combined Code, there is a 
written statement of the division of responsibilities which has 
been reviewed and approved by the board. The chairman is 
Strone Macpherson. His other significant commitments are set 
out in his biography on page 9. The board is satisfied that his 
significant commitments do not restrict him from carrying out 
his duties effectively.

As chairman, Strone Macpherson is primarily responsible for 
leading the board and ensuring the effective engagement and 
contribution of all the directors. His other responsibilities 
include setting the agenda for board meetings, providing the 
directors with information in an accurate, clear and timely 
manner and the promotion of effective decision making. The 
chairman is also charged with ensuring that the directors 
continually update their skills and knowledge and that the 
performance of the board, its committees and the individual 
directors are evaluated on an annual basis.

The group chief executive is Preben Prebensen who is 
primarily responsible for the day-to-day management of the 
group’s business. His other responsibilities include proposing 
and developing strategic objectives for the group, managing 
the group’s risk exposures in line with board policies, 
implementing the decisions of the board and facilitating 
appropriate and effective communication with shareholders 
and regulatory bodies.

Senior independent director
The senior independent director is Bruce Carnegie-Brown.  
In addition to the existing channels for shareholder 
communications, shareholders may discuss any issues or 
concerns they may have with the senior independent director.

Appointment of directors
The appointment of directors is governed by the Company’s 
articles of association, the Companies Act 2006 and other 
applicable regulations and policies. Directors may be elected 
by shareholders in general meeting or appointed by the board 
of directors in accordance with the provisions of the articles of 
association. The articles of association may be amended by 
special resolution of the shareholders.

In accordance with the new UK Corporate Governance Code 
all directors will be subject to re-election at the AGM. The 
board will only recommend to shareholders that executive and 
non-executive directors be proposed for re-election at an AGM 
after evaluating the performance of the individual directors. 
Following the performance evaluations, the board will be 
recommending that all directors be re-elected by shareholders 
and confirms that each director continues to be effective and 
demonstrates commitment to their role.

Powers of directors
The directors are responsible for the management of the 
Company. They may exercise all powers of the Company, 
subject to any directions given by special resolution and the 
articles of association. The directors have been authorised to 
allot and issue ordinary shares and to make market purchases 
of the Company’s ordinary shares by virtue of resolutions 
passed at the Company’s 2009 AGM.

Meetings and attendance
The board has regular scheduled meetings. During the year 
ended 31 July 2010 there were ten scheduled board meetings 
and two ad hoc board meetings called to deal with specific 
time critical business matters. There were also additional 
board meetings convened to deal with operational issues.

The directors receive detailed and comprehensive papers in 
advance of each board meeting. The agenda is set by the 
chairman in consultation with the chief executive, the finance 
director and the company secretary. In addition, each director 
is given the opportunity to review the agenda and propose 
items for discussion with the chairman’s agreement.

The annual schedule of board meetings is decided a 
substantial time in advance in order to ensure the availability of 
each of the directors. In the event that directors are unable to 
attend meetings due to conflicts in their schedule, they receive 
papers in the normal manner and have the opportunity to relay 
their comments in advance of the meeting, as well as follow up 
with the chairman if necessary. The same process applies in 
respect of the various board committees.

The number of board meetings held during the year and the 
attendance by the directors is set out in the table below:

Number of board meetings 2009/2010

Scheduled 
10 

Ad-hoc
2

Executive director:
Stephen Hodges 
Jonathan Howell 
Preben Prebensen 
Non-executive director:
Bruce Carnegie-Brown 
Jamie Cayzer-Colvin 
Ray Greenshields 
Strone Macpherson 
Douglas Paterson 

10 
10 
10 

8 
10 
9 
10 
10 

2
2
2

2
2
2
2
2

Board evaluation
The board conducts a formal and rigorous performance 
evaluation each year to assess its own performance and that 
of its committees and individual directors. The process is led 
by the chairman, who is supported by the company secretary.

U09509_pp27_pp49.indd   30

29/9/10   20:50:37

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

31

Membership of the committees is made up of independent 
non-executive directors only.

At the scheduled board meetings, the chairman of each 
committee provides the board with a summary of key issues 
considered at the committee meetings.

Board governance structure

The Board

Audit
Committee

Remuneration
Committee

Nomination and 
Governance 
Committee

Audit Committee
The membership of the Audit Committee during the year 
ended 31 July 2010, together with a record of attendance at 
meetings which members were eligible to attend, is set out 
below:

Number of meetings scheduled during year – 5
Member 
Douglas Paterson (chairman) 
Bruce Carnegie-Brown 
Ray Greenshields 

Attendance
5
5
5

The committee meetings were scheduled to coincide with the 
financial reporting and audit cycles of the group. The 
committee has throughout the year monitored the integrity of 
the financial statements through a review of the Interim and 
Annual Reports.

The committee is chaired by Douglas Paterson who as a 
senior partner in the banking and capital markets division of 
PricewaterhouseCoopers until 2001 and as a non-executive 
director of Goldman Sachs International Bank has, in the view 
of the board, the appropriate level of recent and relevant 
financial experience as required by the Combined Code.

The company secretary, or her nominee, acts as secretary to 
the committee. The executive directors and heads of group 
finance, risk and compliance attend by invitation. The chairman 
of the board and Jamie Cayzer-Colvin also attend committee 
meetings regularly by invitation. The external auditors and the 
head of internal audit attend all meetings and the committee 
meets privately with them at each meeting.

In 2009 Boardroom Review carried out an independent 
evaluation of the effectiveness of the board and in 2010 was 
reappointed to consider the board’s progress following the 
2009 evaluation. Boardroom Review provides no other 
services to the board and/or the group.

The comprehensive nature of the 2010 review fulfilled both the 
Combined Code and new UK Corporate Governance Code’s 
requirement for the evaluation of the board, its committees and 
the individual directors and took the form of confidential 
interviews between the external assessor and each director 
plus a review of relevant papers. Results from the evaluation 
were collated by the assessor and considered by the chairman 
and chief executive. Feedback was subsequently presented to 
and discussed by the board in July 2010.

The 2010 update review highlighted achievements on the 
development of the board’s strategic processes and the 
strengthening of the governance structure. The report noted 
the introduction of strategic away days, increased informal 
board time and site visits to the board calendar. It 
recommended the introduction of a central training 
programme to coordinate director training.

In addition to the independent board evaluation process, the 
senior independent director led a separate performance review 
in respect of the chairman which involved a review with the 
non-executive directors (excluding the chairman) and separate 
consultation with the chief executive. The senior independent 
director subsequently provided feedback to the chairman on 
his appraisal.

Induction, information and ongoing development
On appointment to the board, each director receives a 
comprehensive induction tailored to the experience and needs 
of the individual. Meetings are arranged with other directors, 
key senior personnel and external advisers. New directors are 
also available to meet major shareholders on request.

The directors are kept informed of relevant regulatory and 
corporate governance developments as they arise by senior 
managers or through the Company’s external advisers. During 
the year ended 31 July 2010, the directors received briefings 
on the Walker Review and the Financial and Reporting Council 
Review of the Combined Code.

In addition, all directors have direct access to the services and 
advice of the company secretary who is responsible for 
ensuring that the board procedures and applicable rules and 
regulations are observed. Directors are able to take 
independent outside professional advice to assist with the 
performance of their duties at the Company’s expense.

Board Committees
The board has established an Audit Committee, a 
Remuneration Committee and a Nomination and Governance 
Committee. Each committee is responsible for the review and 
oversight of activities within its defined terms of reference and 
copies of each committee’s terms of reference are available on 
the Company’s website.

U09509_pp27_pp49.indd   31

29/9/10   20:50:38

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Governance

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Corporate Governance continued

required. The committee balances these benefits with the 
potential impact on auditor independence and believes that 
the agreed policy provides a more relevant measure of auditor 
independence than monetary ratios or guidelines followed by 
some investors. Examples of non-audit services awarded to 
the external auditors in the year to 31 July 2010 include 
taxation fees and a review of hedge accounting models and 
documentation within the Banking division. A breakdown of 
the fees paid to the external auditors in respect of audit and 
non-audit work is included in note 6 on page 67.

Having given consideration to the extra work undertaken by 
the auditors, and after review with the audit partner and the 
executive directors, the committee is satisfied as to the 
independence of the external auditors.

External auditor audit, tax and other non-audit fees

Audit fees £1.2 million
Tax fees £0.3 million
Other non-audit fees £0.3 million

Remuneration Committee
The membership of the Remuneration Committee during the 
year ended 31 July 2010, together with a record of attendance 
at meetings which members were eligible to attend, is set out 
below:

Number of meetings scheduled during the year – 7
Member 
Bruce Carnegie-Brown (chairman) 
Ray Greenshields 
Douglas Paterson 

Attendance
7
6
7

The chairman of the board, chief executive officer, group head 
of human resources and Jamie Cayzer-Colvin attend the 
meetings by invitation. Further details of the role and work of 
the committee are set out in the Report of the Board on 
Directors’ Remuneration on pages 38 to 48.

32

The role of the committee includes:

•	

•	

•	

Monitoring the integrity of the financial statements of the 
Company and the form and content of published 
announcements;

Reviewing accounting policies, accounting treatments, 
judgements and disclosures in financial reports;

Reviewing the adequacy of the group’s system of risk 
management, regulatory compliance and internal control;

•	

Reviewing the group’s whistleblowing procedures;

•	

•	

Monitoring and reviewing the effectiveness of the group 
internal audit function;

Making recommendations to the board as to the 
appointment or reappointment and remuneration of the 
external auditors, including assessing independence and 
objectivity, approving their terms of engagement and 
reviewing their findings and performance and overseeing 
the relationship with them; and

•	

Developing and implementing policy on the engagement of 
the external auditor to supply non-audit services, taking into 
account relevant ethical guidance regarding the provision of 
non-audit services by the external audit firm.

The committee reports to the board on all these issues, 
identifying any matters in respect of which it considers that 
action or improvement is needed, and makes 
recommendations as to the steps to be taken.

During the year, the committee particularly focused on the 
following areas:

•	

The group’s annual and half year reporting including 
significant reporting judgements made by management;

•	

;
Review of the group’s tax policy

•	

Consideration o
more diversified funding mix in the Banking division 
following the credit crisis;

f the hedge accounting implications of the 

•	

Review of the group’s foreign exchange policy

; and

•	

Review of the group’s hedging policy for employee share 
plans.

As in previous years, the committee conducted a review of the 
service provided by the group’s external auditors. The results 
of this review were shared with the external auditors to provide 
a basis for its recommendation as to their reappointment.

Non-audit services policy and auditors’ independence
The group’s auditors are Deloitte LLP. The committee 
assesses annually the independence of the auditors as well as 
their qualifications, expertise and resources and the 
effectiveness of the audit process. In assessing their 
independence, the committee considers the level of non-audit 
work carried out by the auditors and has agreed a clear policy 
on the engagement of the external auditors for non-audit 
services to ensure any such engagement does not impair their 
objectivity and independence. The committee must pre 
approve any work awarded over £100,000. The policy reflects 
the committee’s view that there are benefits to the auditors 
carrying out non-audit work where it is closely related to the 
audit and/or where a detailed understanding of the group is 

U09509_pp27_pp49.indd   32

29/9/10   20:50:38

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Nomination and Governance Committee
The membership of the Nomination and Governance 
Committee during the year ended 31 July 2010, together with 
a record of attendance at meetings which members were 
eligible to attend, is set out below:

appropriate controls are put in place to manage those risks. 
Such systems are designed to manage rather than eliminate 
the risk of failure to achieve business objectives and can only 
provide reasonable, but not absolute, assurance against 
material misstatement or loss.

33

Number of meetings scheduled during year – 4
Member 
Strone Macpherson (chairman) 
Bruce Carnegie-Brown 
Ray Greenshields 
Douglas Paterson 

Attendance
4
3
4
4

The chief executive and Jamie Cayzer-Colvin attend by 
invitation.

The role of the committee includes:

•	

Considering the appointment or retirement of directors;

•	

•	

•	

Reviewing proposed nominations and governance 
procedures and to make recommendations thereon to the 
board. Before an appointment is made, the skills, 
knowledge and experience required for a particular 
appointment are evaluated and external advisers may be 
used to facilitate the search for suitable candidates;

Regular reviews of the structure, size and composition of 
the board;

Considering the leadership needs of the group and 
succession planning; and

•	

Assessing the contribution of non-executive directors.

During the year the committee met to consider the recruitment 
and appointment of a new non-executive director, the 
reappointments of existing non-executive directors and the 
impact of the Walker Review on board structure and the 
annual reappointment of directors.

Conflicts of Interest
The shareholders approved new articles of association at the 
AGM held on 18 November 2009, which include provisions 
giving the directors authority to approve conflicts of interest 
and potential conflicts of interest as permitted under the 
Companies Act 2006.

A procedure has been established whereby actual and 
potential conflicts of interest are regularly reviewed, and 
appropriate authorisation sought, prior to the appointment of 
any new director or if a new conflict arises. The decision to 
authorise a conflict of interest can only be made by non-
conflicted directors and in making such a decision the 
directors must act in a way they consider, in good faith, will be 
most likely to promote the success of the Company. The 
board believes this procedure operated effectively throughout 
the year.

Internal Control and Risk Management
The board has overall responsibility for the group’s systems of 
risk management, regulatory compliance and internal control 
and for reviewing their effectiveness. The systems are 
designed to ensure that the key risks, both internal and 
external faced by the Company and its subsidiaries in the 
conduct of their business are identified and evaluated so that 

Risk management is the process of identifying the principal 
business risks to the group achieving its strategic objectives, 
establishing appropriate controls to manage those risks and 
checking that appropriate monitoring and reporting systems 
are in place. The group’s risk management process balances 
cost against risk within the constraints of the group’s risk 
appetite and is consistent with the prudent management 
required of a large financial organisation.

The risk management framework is based on the concept of 
“three lines of defence”:

•	

•	

Risk management: Primary responsibility for strategy, 
performance and risk management lies with the board, the 
chief executive and the heads of each division and 
operating business;

Risk oversight: Risk management oversight is provided by 
the group risk and compliance committee (“GRCC”) and 
the head of group risk working with counterparts in the 
divisions and operating businesses and with group 
compliance; and

•	

Independent assurance: Independent assurance on the 
effectiveness of the risk management systems is provided 
by group internal audit reporting to the Audit Committee.

There are clear reporting lines and defined areas of 
responsibility at board, divisional and business level. This 
structure is designed to check, amongst other things, that key 
issues and developments are escalated on a timely basis. The 
group’s risk management framework requires that all of the 
group’s divisions and operating businesses establish a 
process for identifying, evaluating and managing the key risks 
that they face.

The composition and duties of the Audit Committee are 
described on pages 31 and 32. The GRCC is a committee 
established by the chief executive to assist him in the group 
wide management of risk. Its membership is made up of the 
group’s executive committee members and the heads of 
group risk, compliance and internal audit. It meets monthly 
and is responsible for:

•	

•	

•	

•	

The group’s risk management strategy, approach and 
policy;

Recommending for board approval the group’s risk 
appetite;

The approval of group wide policies in respect of risk 
management and regulatory compliance including limits of 
authority; and

Reviewing regular reports on significant risk management, 
regulatory compliance and internal control issues and for 
monitoring their analysis and resolution.

U09509_pp27_pp49.indd   33

29/9/10   20:50:38

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Governance

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Corporate Governance continued

34

The system of internal control is supported by a well 
established organisational structure within the group, with clear 
levels of responsibility and delegation of authority and a strong 
control culture embedded in the management of each 
operating company. Each operating company in the group 
regularly undertakes a review of, and reports to its board on, 
these controls and procedures, having due regard to its key 
risks. Where necessary, steps are taken to improve internal 
control and risk management further, following these reviews. 
The principal risks and uncertainties shown on pages 22 to 26 
of the Business Review describe these key risks and explains 
how they are controlled.

Group internal audit regularly reviews the effectiveness of 
controls and procedures established by the Company and its 
operating businesses to manage key risks. The head of group 
internal audit reports functionally to the Audit Committee 
through the chairman of that committee and to the finance 
director who provides support and guidance to the function 
including the professional development of the head of group 
internal audit. The head of group internal audit has unfettered 
access to the board.

An annual plan is presented to the Audit Committee each year, 
which focuses in particular on higher risk areas of the group’s 
business. The committee regularly reviews the scope and 
results of internal audit work across the group and the 
implementation of recommendations. It also assesses the 
scope of the work to cover all key activities of the group and 
concentrates on higher risk areas.

The Company has complied with the Turnbull Committee’s 
guidance for directors. Identifying, evaluating and managing 
the group’s significant risks is an ongoing process which is 
regularly reviewed by the board, and which has been in place 
for the year ended 31 July 2010 and up to the date of the 
approval of these financial statements.

Investor Relations
The group has an extensive investor relations (“IR”) programme 
which aims to keep shareholders and financial analysts 
informed about the group’s performance throughout the year 
and to ensure they have appropriate access to the group’s 
management. The IR team also regularly provides the board 
with feedback from investor meetings, relevant analyst 
research and updates on share price performance.

In addition to announcements and reporting around the 
financial calendar, the IR programme includes meetings, 
telephone discussions and investor presentations – notably 
this year a briefing by the management team of the Securities 
division – designed to provide shareholders with greater detail 
on the businesses within the group. The chief executive and 
finance director meet with current and prospective 
shareholders on a regular basis in the UK, continental Europe 
and the US. This year over 75 meetings were held.

The chairman and the senior independent director are 
available to meet with major shareholders from time to time, 
particularly in relation to corporate governance and 
remuneration. Shareholders also have the opportunity to ask 
questions to the board at the AGM, either in person or by 
submitting written questions in advance. The chairmen of each 

of the board committees attend the AGM, and all other 
directors are expected to attend the meeting.

During the year the group demonstrated its commitment to 
electronic forms of communication by upgrading its corporate 
website. The latest financial reports, news releases, 
presentation materials and web casts of financial presentations 
are available on the IR section of the Close Brothers Group 
website www.closebrothers.co.uk.

Substantial Shareholdings
The Company has been notified as at 15 September 2010 
under the provisions of the Disclosure and Transparency Rules 
of the following significant interests in the voting rights of the 
Company.

Caledonia Investments 
Prudential 
Aberdeen Asset Management 
Artemis Investment Management 
Lloyds Banking Group 
Schroders 
Aviva 
Legal & General 

Ordinary 
shares 
millions 
19.6 
11.6 
10.7 
9.3 
7.8 
7.1 
6.2 
5.7 

Voting
rights
%
13.56
8.03
7.40
6.42
5.40
4.90
4.27
3.95

Substantial shareholders do not have different voting rights 
from those of other shareholders.

Going Concern
The group’s business activities, together with the factors likely 
to affect its future development and performance and its 
summarised financial position are set out in the Chairman’s 
and Chief Executive’s Statement and Business Review on 
pages 2 to 5 and 11 to 21 respectively. The principal risks and 
uncertainties the group currently faces are described on 
pages 22 to 26 of the Business Review along with the ways 
the group seeks to manage those risks.

The group has a strong, proven and conservative business 
model and a range of diversified financial services businesses. 
It has traded profitably through the recent credit crisis as well 
as in previous economic downturns.

After making enquiries, the directors have a reasonable 
expectation that the Company and the group have adequate 
resources to continue in operational existence for the 
foreseeable future. Accordingly, they continue to adopt the 
going concern basis in preparing the Annual Report.

Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities
The directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report 
and the financial statements. The directors are required to 
prepare accounts for the group in accordance with 
International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”) as 
adopted by the European Union and Article 4 of the 
International Accounting Standards (“IAS”) Regulation, and 
have chosen to prepare company financial statements in 
accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted 
Accounting Practice (“UK GAAP”).

U09509_pp27_pp49.indd   34

29/9/10   20:50:38

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

35

The directors confirm that to the best of their knowledge:

•	

•	

The financial statements, prepared in accordance with IFRS 
and UK GAAP, give a true and fair view of the assets, 
liabilities, financial position and profit of the consolidated 
group undertakings as well as the Company; and

The management reports, which are incorporated by 
reference into the Report of the Directors, include a fair 
review of the development and performance of the 
business and the position of the consolidated group 
undertakings as well as the Company, together with a 
description of the principal risks and uncertainties they face.

By order of the board

Elizabeth Lee 
Company Secretary

28 September 2010

In the case of IFRS accounts, IAS 1 requires that financial 
statements present fairly for each financial year the group’s 
financial position, financial performance and cash flows. This 
requires the faithful representation of the effects of 
transactions, other events and conditions in accordance with 
the definitions and recognition criteria for assets, liabilities, 
income and expenses set out in the International Accounting 
Standards Board’s “Framework for the Preparation and 
Presentation of Financial Statements”. In virtually all 
circumstances, a fair presentation will be achieved by 
compliance with all applicable IFRS. Directors are also 
required to:

•	 Properly select and apply accounting policies;

•	 Present information, including accounting policies, in a 

manner that provides relevant, reliable, comparable and 
understandable information;

•	 Provide additional disclosures when compliance with the 

specific requirements in IFRS is insufficient to enable users 
to understand the impact of particular transactions, other 
events and conditions on the group’s financial position and 
financial performance; and

•	 Prepare the accounts on a going concern basis unless, 
having assessed the ability of the group to continue as a 
going concern, management either intends to liquidate the 
group or to cease trading, or have no realistic alternative but 
to do so.

In the case of UK GAAP accounts, the directors are required 
to prepare financial statements for each financial year which 
give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Company 
and of the profit or loss of the Company for that period. In 
preparing these financial statements, the directors are required 
to: select suitable accounting policies and then apply them 
consistently; make judgements and estimates that are 
reasonable and prudent; state whether all applicable 
accounting standards have been followed, subject to any 
material departures disclosed and explained in the financial 
statements; and prepare the financial statements on the going 
concern basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the 
Company will continue in business.

The directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting 
records that disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the 
financial position of the group and the Company and to enable 
them to ensure that the group financial statements comply 
with the Companies Act 2006 and Article 4 of the IAS 
Regulation and that the Company financial statements and the 
Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration comply with 
the Companies Act 2006. They are also responsible for 
safeguarding the assets of the Company and the group and 
hence for taking reasonable steps for the prevention and 
detection of fraud and other irregularities.

U09509_pp27_pp49.indd   35

29/9/10   20:50:38

Governance

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Corporate Responsibility

36

Introduction
Close Brothers aims to integrate Corporate Responsibility 
(“CR”) across the group’s businesses.

The board continues to focus on:

•	

 Ensuring recognition of CR initiatives throughout the group;

•	

 The group’s employees;

•	

;
 Acting responsibly to its customers

•	

 The environmental impact of its activities generally; and

•	

 The group’s contribution to local communities.

The board encourages the adoption of key CR principles 
across all group companies. Given the diversified nature of the 
group, it is the responsibility of each of the businesses to 
implement the group’s CR principles.

During the year, a CR committee was established and is 
chaired by a member of the Executive Committee to promote 
recognition of CR within the group. The committee has 
representatives from across the group and provides a forum 
for sharing ideas and to raise the profile and importance of CR 
efforts and objectives within the group. The committee has 
decided initially to focus on employee engagement and 
contribution to the community. Initiatives in support of these 
objectives are already under way and will continue over the 
coming year.

Employees
The group is committed to recruiting, training, developing and 
retaining high calibre people in order to maximise their 
potential and derive business benefits.

The group values diversity in its employees and is committed 
to providing equality of opportunity regardless of race, gender, 
age, disability, sexual orientation or religion. This applies both 
to recruitment and the promotion and development of people 
who are already employed. In the event of employees 
becoming disabled, every effort is made to ensure their 
employment with the group continues and specialised training 
is provided where appropriate.

The group’s businesses are responsible for implementing their 
own health and safety policy to establish procedures 
appropriate to their particular activities. All businesses have a 
health and safety policy which is communicated to employees 
as part of a joining induction pack, staff handbook or via the 
intranet. In addition, each business has a health and safety 
representative accountable for reviewing the policy and 
ensuring that stress or injury at the workplace is minimised.

During the year, the group introduced an Employee Assistance 
Programme (“EAP”) called UNUM LifeWorks which is available 
to all UK based permanent and fixed term employees. It is a 
free, confidential service that gives access to employees and 
their immediate family to discuss work, health or family matters 
24 hours a day, 365 days a year. As well as providing  
a support and counselling service, it also provides free  
advice and practical help on a variety of matters, for example 
finding childcare, selling a house or finding local tradesmen.  
At the year end, over 90% of staff were covered by an EAP  
or similar programme.

The group supports flexible working practices and this year, 
the group has promoted childcare vouchers and highlighted 
the benefits of these to staff. Employee benefits for staff vary 
across the group, however all divisions offer pension and life 
assurance to UK based staff. 

The group is committed to training and development of its staff 
including training for further qualifications. All of the group’s 
businesses have a performance management process to 
assist in identifying training needs of staff and these needs are 
included in local training plans.

The total investment in staff training increased year-on-year 
with over two thirds of employees attending internal or external 
training courses during the year.

The group offers a Save As You Earn Sharesave scheme to  
all eligible UK based employees allowing them to participate 
directly in the success of the group. In the 2009 financial year, 
the board reduced the eligibility criteria for employees from two 
years service to six months in order to encourage increased 
participation in the scheme. As a result, in the 2010 financial 
year, approximately one third of all staff across the group 
participated in the scheme, up from one quarter of all staff  
last year.

As part of the focus on employee engagement the group has 
looked at ways of improving communication. A group wide 
intranet, with an employee directory, has been developed to 
support the sharing of information and networking. Leadership 
briefings and “townhall meetings” have been introduced and 
used as a forum to share understanding of group and 
divisional strategy. Plans are under way for an employee 
opinion survey to be carried out in the 2011 financial year. This 
will give all staff the opportunity to provide feedback on an 
anonymous basis enhancing communication between 
employees and the leadership team and enabling the group to 
identify opportunities to increase employee engagement.

Responsible Finance
The group’s success and strong reputation depends on 
ensuring that all customers are treated fairly. The group has a 
successful track record of building long-term relationships with 
its customers.

Treating Customers Fairly (“TCF”) has been embedded across 
all group companies, both onshore and offshore, and is central 
to the group’s business ethos. Group control functions 
continue to be responsible for the monitoring of the application 
of TCF across the businesses, and ensuring all staff are briefed 
on TCF policies and initiatives. TCF remains an ongoing 
process and the group will continually look to develop its 
policies and procedures taking into account current regulatory 
views and industry best practice.

The group recognises its responsibility to minimise the 
opportunity for fraud across its businesses. All group 
companies have anti-money laundering, whistle blowing and, 
where appropriate, fraud prevention policies.

Each of our regulated businesses has a dedicated anti-money 
laundering and compliance officer who reports to the head of 
group compliance. Regular training is given to all staff to 
ensure continuing awareness of anti-money laundering and 

U09509_pp27_pp49.indd   36

29/9/10   20:50:39

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

37

participating in fundraising activities, an increase from last year, 
with the remainder from direct group donations. All of the 
businesses made donations to local, national and global 
charities. The group’s largest contributions were to the Prince’s 
Trust and NSPCC. In addition, the businesses held various 
events to support the fundraising for Haiti, as well as making 
direct contributions to the British Red Cross and Disasters 
Emergency Committee related appeals.

In addition to the local charities that are supported, the group 
plans to work in partnership with a nominated charity for 
fundraising and support over the next twelve months. The 
charity will be chosen by a staff vote organised by the CR 
committee.

fraud prevention issues. In addition, there are whistle blowing 
arrangements to enable staff to report incidents confidentially. 
The group is also well positioned to ensure that it complies 
with the implementation of the Bribery Act in April 2011.

Environment
The group recognises the importance of managing and 
minimising the environmental impact of its activities.

The group is complying with the requirements of the new 
Carbon Reduction Committee Energy Efficiency Scheme 
which is the UK’s mandatory climate change and energy 
saving scheme.

The group’s head office, 10 Crown Place, was refurbished in 
the year with consideration given to energy saving measures, 
better waste management and recycling facilities and a range 
of carbon reduction measures for lighting such as a Passive 
Infra Red system.

The group has recently carried out an energy audit at its head 
office and one of its other London based offices and continues 
to engage closely with an energy consultancy firm in 
developing its energy and environmental policy.

The group continues its commitment to limit greenhouse gas 
emissions and water usage and to recycle waste materials at 
its head office. This includes the use of green tariff energy and 
a recycling programme for toners, paper and general waste.

Community
The group continues to encourage employee participation in 
local community projects. In an effort to enhance its work with 
the community this year, the group launched a work 
experience programme offering young students aged 17 to 19 
years, one week’s work experience in different departments 
within the group. These candidates were offered placements 
across the group and benefited from exposure to a work 
environment and a breadth of activities. The group is also 
planning another one week work experience programme in 
November 2010, partnering with a Tower Hamlets school close 
to the group’s London head office in order to give children 
aged 14 to 15 years the chance to experience life within a City 
financial services organisation.

The group also encourages charitable donations by offering a 
Give As You Earn (“GAYE”) scheme to onshore staff. During 
the year, a promotion programme was launched to encourage 
participation in this scheme, with organised site visits to all 
locations and a donation by the group to a charity of the 
employees choice for all employees signing up to the scheme 
over the summer. In addition, information has been made 
available on the group intranet and local intranet sites within 
the businesses and has been given to new starters as part of 
induction packs. As a result, participation in the scheme has 
grown to over 10% of the UK based employees, nearly double 
that in the 2009 financial year, making the group eligible for a 
gold quality mark in March 2011.

As a result of the increase in the participation in the GAYE 
scheme, and an increase in awareness of charitable giving 
more broadly, during the year the group increased the amount 
donated to £281,000 (2009: £154,000). Of this, over 20% was 
raised through a matched funding scheme for employees 

U09509_pp27_pp49.indd   37

29/9/10   20:50:39

Governance

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration

38

This report has been prepared in accordance with the relevant 
provisions of Schedule 8 to the Accounting Regulations under 
the Companies Act 2006 and has been approved by the 
board. The report also meets the relevant requirements of the 
Listing Rules of the FSA and describes how the board has 
applied the principles relating to directors’ remuneration in the 
Combined Code. It will be presented to shareholders for 
approval at the AGM on 18 November 2010.

Certain parts of this report are audited by the company’s 
auditors Deloitte LLP and are marked as “audited” for clarity.

Introduction
The Remuneration Committee (“the Committee”) has had a full 
agenda over the past year as the continuing changes in the 
competitive and regulatory landscape have presented a 
number of challenges. Within this environment the Committee 
has attempted to balance the needs of all key stakeholders.

As set out in the 2009 Annual Report, the Committee had 
proposed to implement a number of changes to the 
remuneration policy and incentive structure for senior 
executives. The primary reasons for this were:

•	

•	

•	

To improve alignment of the remuneration policy with the 
strategic priorities of the group;

To create a more explicit link between the group’s 
management of risk and its remuneration policies; and

To change the components of compensation to increase 
both the levels of deferral and the amount of equity as a 
proportion of total compensation.

New remuneration policies and approaches that have been 
reviewed and implemented by the Committee over the year 
are outlined in the “Committee activities during the year” 
section. The Committee feels that by implementing these 
changes, the group has adopted those codes of practice and 
corporate governance guidance (as proposed by organisations 
including the FSA, the Financial Stability Board of the G20 and 
the European Parliament) which are appropriate to its business 
model and organisational structure. However, with the release 
of the proposed revisions to the FSA’s Remuneration Code in 
late July 2010, the Committee recognises that further changes 
to the remuneration policy may be necessary over the next 
year. Ensuring compliance with the Remuneration Code 
(where appropriate and subject to the proportionality 
provisions contained therein) will be a primary objective of the 
Committee over the next year.

The Committee chairman will be available to answer questions 
at the forthcoming AGM on 18 November 2010.

The Remuneration Committee
The Committee’s objectives
The Committee’s terms of reference comply with the 
Combined Code and are available from the company 
secretary and can be found on the Company’s website www.
closebrothers.co.uk/boardcommittees.aspx. The Committee’s 
key objectives are to:

•	

•	

•	

Determine the over-arching principles and parameters of 
remuneration policy on a group wide basis;

Establish and maintain a competitive remuneration package 
to attract, motivate and retain high calibre executive 
directors and senior management across the group;

Promote the achievement of both the 
and its strategic objectives by providing a remuneration 
package that contains appropriately motivating targets that 
are consistent with the group’s risk appetite (see page 22 
“Risk Appetite and Reputation”); and

group’s annual plans 

•	

Align senior executives’ remuneration with the interests 
of shareholders.

The Committee’s main responsibilities are to:

•	

•	

•	

•	

•	

•	

•	

•	

Review and determine the total remuneration packages of 
executive directors and other senior executives in 
consultation with the chairman and chief executive and 
within the terms of the agreed policy. This includes 
bonuses, incentive payments, share options, share awards 
and benefits;

Approve the design and targets of any performance related 
pay schemes operated by the group;

Review the design of all employee share incentive plans, 
including the granting of awards, the setting and testing of 
performance conditions and the exercise of any discretion 
on the granting of good leaver status or regarding material 
amendments to the plan rules not requiring the approval  
of shareholders;

Ensure that contractual terms on termination and any 
payments made are fair to the individual and the group, 
that failure is not rewarded and that a duty to mitigate loss 
is fully recognised;

Review any major changes in employee benefits structures 
throughout the group;

Select, appoint and determine terms of reference for 
independent remuneration consultants to advise the 
Committee on remuneration policy and levels of remuneration;

Ensure that provisions regarding disclosure of remuneration 
are fulfilled; and

Seek advice from 
structures and annual bonuses are appropriately aligned to 
the group’s risk appetite.

group risk to ensure remuneration 

U09509_pp27_pp49.indd   38

29/9/10   20:50:39

 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Committee membership
The Committee consists of three independent non-executive 
directors, namely Bruce Carnegie-Brown (chairman), Ray 
Greenshields and Douglas Paterson. All served throughout the 
year. The chairman of the board, chief executive, group head 
of human resources and Jamie Cayzer-Colvin attend meetings 
by invitation. The company secretary or her nominee acts as 
secretary to the Committee. Each member’s attendance is set 
out in the table on page 32.

In line with the Combined Code requirements, the board 
undertook a review of the effectiveness of the Committee 
during the year and, as a result, has refined the scope and 
focus of its work in a number of areas, including an evaluation 
of the performance ratings assigned to employees across the 
group, expanding the number of senior individuals within the 
group whose performance is reviewed in detail by the 
Committee and increasing the attention to risk management in 
its review of compensation decisions.

Committee activities during the year
The Committee is required by its terms of reference to meet at 
least twice a year and has a standing calendar of items within 
its remit. In addition to these standing items, the Committee 
discusses matters relating to the operation of the remuneration 
policy and emerging regulatory and market practices. The 
Committee met on seven occasions during the year and 
discussed, amongst others, the issues set out as follows:

Meeting 

Agenda item

September	2009	 •	 	Approval	of	the	2008/2009	 

remuneration report;

39

•	 	Shareholder	feedback	on	proposed	

changes to the remuneration package 
for executive directors including the new 
Long Term Incentive Plan (the “2009 
LTIP”) and Share Match Plan (the “SMP”);

•	 	Review	of	the	Inland Revenue approved 
Savings Related Share Option Scheme 
(the “SAYE Scheme”) rules to ensure 
continued compliance with current 
legislation and market practice; and

•	 	The	measurement	of	performance	

conditions and determination of vesting 
levels of the 2006 awards made under 
the 2004 Long Term Incentive Plan (the 
“2004 LTIP”).

November	2009	 •		Review	and	approval	of	2009	LTIP	
awards; and

•	 	Review	of	bonus deferral for key senior 

staff within the Securities division.

February	2010	

•	 	Review	of	the	measures	by	which	the	

performance of strategic goals within the 
2009 LTIP will be assessed.

March	2010	

•		Review	of	the	recommendations	

regarding remuneration from the FSA 
Code of Practice, Walker Review and 
Financial Reporting Council Review of 
the Combined Code and discussion of 
their potential application and impact on 
the group;

•	 	Review	of	the	proposed	approach	to	
consideration and determination of 
2009/2010 bonuses; and

•	 	Approval	of	remuneration	packages for 

the appointments to head of 
Commercial, Banking and head of 
Treasury, Banking.

•	 	Approval	of	governance	structure	 
for remuneration and termination 
packages; and

•	 	Review	of	anticipated	bonus	pool	spend	

for 2009/2010.

April	2010	

June	2010	

•	 	Review	of	initial	proposals	for	the	
2009/2010 compensation review.

July	2010	

•	 	Review	and	approval	of	2009	LTIP	

awards for 2010;

•	 	Review	and	approval	of	final	bonus	pools;

•	 	Review	and	approval	of	specific	

recommendations for salary and bonus 
awards to the executive directors and 
key senior management within the 
group; and

•	 	Review	of	future	long-term divisional 

incentive compensation plan.

U09509_pp27_pp49.indd   39

29/9/10   20:50:39

	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
Governance

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration
continued

40

Advice
During the year under review and up to the date of this report, 
the Committee consulted and took advice from the following 
advisors and executives in respect of the matters set out below:

Hewitt New Bridge Street
•	

Periodic monitoring of the 2004 
return (“TSR”) targets.

LTIP total shareholder 

PricewaterhouseCoopers (“PwC”)
•	

New executive remuneration policy and long-term incentive 
plan structure.

Slaughter and May
•	
Operation of the 

group’s share plans.

Chief executive
•	

2009/2010 compensation recommendations for executive 
directors and other senior executives; and

•	

Recommendations regarding divisional incentive structures.

Finance director
•	

Funding and hedging approach in relation to the equity 
based elements of the Omnibus Share Incentive Plan and 
existing plans.

Group head of human resources
•	

Approach to assess performance against the strategic 
goals in the 2009 LTIP;

•	

•	

Governance on approval for reward and termination 
packages;

Approach to 
employee performance ratings and the 
compensation review process across the group; and

•	

Approach to divisional incentive structures.

Where appropriate the Committee receives input and 
information from the chairman of the board, chief executive, 
finance director, group head of human resources and  
the company secretary although this never relates to their  
own remuneration.

PwC provide advice to management on relevant remuneration 
matters. PwC also provided consultancy services to the group 
during the financial year. Slaughter and May provided other 
legal services to the group during the financial year.

Remuneration Policy
The Committee remains focused on ensuring that 
remuneration policy and incentive structures enable the group 
to recruit the people it needs and to retain and motivate 
existing staff. It believes reward should be aligned with 
performance and that good risk management forms an 
integral part of remuneration policy.

At the executive level, the Committee works to ensure the 
executive remuneration policy creates alignment between 
management and shareholders’ interests, while being mindful 
of the interests of other key stakeholders, including regulators. 
The new incentive structure for executive directors, agreed 
with shareholders in 2009, has been implemented this year. 
The Committee believes this has achieved a good balance 
between elements linked to short-term financial performance 
and those linked to longer-term shareholder value creation.

Retention and motivation of key senior executives has been 
further enhanced through targeted use of the new LTIP and 
increased levels of deferral. As in previous years the 
Committee reviewed individual justifications for the bonus 
awards to key executives within the group.

The Committee has also reviewed the remuneration approach 
across the group. As a result the remuneration governance, 
performance management and compensation review 
processes across the group have been enhanced this year to 
increase focus on the importance of good risk management 
and alignment of pay with both financial and non financial 
performance measures for all staff.

The majority of employees in the group have the potential to 
receive a performance related element of pay as part of their 
overall compensation package. This element is based on a 
combination of the overall performance of the business and 
individual performance. Employees have individual objectives 
against which their personal performance is rated. These 
objectives cover both financial and non financial measures, 
including risk management objectives appropriate to their role. 
In addition to the assessment of performance against these 
objectives (conducted by an individual’s line manager as part 
of their overall performance review) the group head of risk 
reports independently to the Committee on behalf of group 
risk, compliance and audit to ensure that any concerns 
highlighted by the control functions during the year are 
appropriately addressed in individual remuneration proposals.

Final determination of performance related pay for staff in the 
group risk, compliance and audit functions is determined by 
the group heads of those functions and is based on their 
performance against risk, compliance and audit objectives.

The Committee has reviewed its role in line with changes in 
best practices during the year. As a result new governance has 
been introduced across the group to ensure that the 
Committee has oversight of individual remuneration and 
termination packages for key employees and those with 
significant compensation packages. The governance also 
covers changes to compensation structures for groups of 
individuals and mandates the involvement of group risk in 
determining new structures to ensure that they are 
appropriately aligned to the risk profile of the business in 
which they operate.

U09509_pp27_pp49.indd   40

29/9/10   20:50:39

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Remuneration Policy in Practice for Executive Directors
Element 

Policy

Element 

Policy

41

Base salary 

Annual bonus 

 The Committee determines the level of 
base salary for each executive director 
annually taking into account salaries in 
relevant comparator companies and 
specific factors relating to individual 
performance. Pay for the broader 
employee population is also taken into 
account when setting base salaries.

 Executive directors and other senior 
executives are eligible to receive annual 
bonus awards under which discretionary 
payments may be made based on the 
achievement of pre-determined 
objectives. The new arrangements 
agreed with shareholders in 2009 are in 
operation for the first time in the 2010 
financial year. Under these, the annual 
bonus for 2010 for executive directors is 
capped at 300% of base salary. Any 
bonus paid up to 100% of base salary is 
paid in cash. Any bonus earned over 
100% of base salary will be deferred into 
group shares for a period of two years.

The DAB and SMP received shareholder 
Deferred Annual  
Bonus (“DAB”) and  approval at the AGM in November 2009 
Share Matching  
Plan (“SMP”) 

and will operate for the first time in 
 respect of annual bonuses awarded for 
the 2010 financial year. In addition to any 
bonus over 100% being deferred into 
shares (“Deferred Shares”), executives 
can choose to invest up to 100% of base 
salary from their total annual bonus into 
Close Brothers Group plc shares 
(“Invested Shares”) for three years or 
convert their Deferred Shares into 
Invested Shares thus extending the 
deferral period from two to three years. 
Performance conditions will not apply to 
the Deferred Shares or Invested Shares 
which will be released in full at the end of 
their respective holding periods.

Long Term 
Incentive Plan 

The 2009 LTIP is intended to motivate 
 executives to achieve the group’s 
longer-term strategic objectives, to aid 
the attraction and retention of key staff 
and to align executive interests with 
those of shareholders. Executive 
directors are eligible to receive an annual 
award of shares with a face value of up 
to 200% of base salary. Awards vest 
after three years subject to achieving 
absolute TSR growth, adjusted Earnings 
Per Share (“EPS”) growth and strategic 
performance targets.

Shareholding guideline
Executive directors are required to build and maintain a 
shareholding of two times base salary over a reasonable  
time frame.

Overview of Directors’ remuneration in 2009/2010
The key elements of the remuneration structure for the year 
ended 31 July 2010 are set out in this section. In addition, it 
sets out what and how directors were paid during the year and 
the rationale for those payments.

Link between reward and performance
The group achieved a good overall performance for the year 
with very strong performance in the Banking division and 
continued good performance in Securities, particularly  
from Winterflood.

The Banking division has actively taken advantage of 
favourable business conditions and delivered a strong 
performance. Winterflood has continued to benefit from its 
leading market position resulting in continued strong 
performance. Asset Management is an area of significant 
investment for the group and the group recognises the need  
to invest to attract, retain and motivate key individuals during 
this period of significant change.

These factors were taken into consideration in determining 
bonus payments for directors for the financial year.

 Invested Shares will be matched with 
free Matching Shares for every Invested 
Share subject to performance conditions 
over the three year deferral period. The 
Committee has determined the matching 
ratio for the 2010 award for executive 
directors to be two Matching Shares for 
each Invested Share. The performance 
conditions for the 2010 Matching  
Share awards will be the same as the 
performance conditions in respect of this 
year’s awards under the 2009 LTIP. The 
Committee considers the three year 
deferral period under the SMP to be 
appropriately motivational for participants 
and long enough to deal with risk 
adjusted performance of the group.

U09509_pp27_pp49.indd   41

29/9/10   20:50:39

 
42

Governance

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration
continued

Base salary and benefits
In determining base pay for the 2011 financial year, the 
Committee has been mindful of the current inflationary 
environment and the fact that base pay for executive directors 
has not been increased in the previous three years. As a result, 
base salaries for the 2011 financial year for Stephen Hodges 
and Jonathan Howell will be increased. In the case of Preben 
Prebensen, who joined the group on 1 April 2009, his first 
base salary review will be 1 August 2011. Details of base 
salaries paid to the executive directors during the year and the 
new base salaries for Stephen Hodges and Jonathan Howell 
are set out below. In addition, the group also provided benefits 
which consisted of healthcare cover, prolonged disability and 
life assurance cover, a company car or payment of an 
allowance in lieu thereof and a pension contribution or 
payment of an allowance in lieu thereof.

Executive director 

Preben Prebensen1 
Stephen Hodges 
Jonathan Howell 

Annual base salary

1 August 2009 to 

From 
 31 July 2010  1 August 2010 

Increase
%

£475,000  £475,000 
£367,500  £386,000 
£360,000  £370,000 

–
5
3

1Preben Prebensen’s first base salary review will be 1 August 2011.

Annual bonus
The annual bonus policy which was applied during the year is 
described on page 41. Bonus payments made in respect of 
the 2010 financial year were determined by equal reference to 
adjusted profit before tax performance and individual 
performance. 50% of Preben Prebensen and of Jonathan 
Howell’s 2010 bonuses were calculated by reference to group 
adjusted profit before tax. 50% of Stephen Hodges’ bonus 
was determined by a mix of group and Banking division 
performance. The remaining 50% for all three was determined 
by reference to performance against individual objectives.

Adjusted operating profit before tax for 2009/2010 was £121.3 
million, a 7% increase on the prior year. Adjusted operating 
profit before tax for the Banking division for 2009/2010 was 
£79.5 million, a 47% increase on the prior year. Bonus 
payments for the executive directors have correspondingly 
been increased to reflect the performance of the group, the 
Banking division and the individuals themselves. There has 
also been a significant increase in the proportion of the annual 
bonus to be time deferred and paid in shares. Over 60% of the 
2010 total bonus entitlement in respect of the executive 
directors will be deferred as compared to 40% deferred in the 
prior year.

Bonus payments are not pensionable.

Annual bonus and deferral

Deferred Awards
Awards made to executive directors during the year were in 
line with the Committee’s general principles that bonus awards 
up to 100% of base salary will be paid in cash without deferral 
and bonus in excess of 100% of base salary will be deferred in 
shares which vest after two years (“the Deferred Awards”). The 
Deferred Awards will be forfeited if the executive director leaves 
employment in certain circumstances or is dismissed for 
cause before the relevant vesting date. The number of shares 
comprised in the Deferred Awards was determined by 
reference to the market value of Close Brothers Group plc 
shares shortly following the announcement of the Company’s 
results for the relevant financial year. Following vesting, these 
shares may be called for at any time up to the seventh 
anniversary of grant. When the shares are called for, the 
executive director is entitled to the gross value of dividends in 
respect of the shares under the Deferred Awards accumulated 
over the period of deferral.

During the year under review, Deferred Awards were made to 
the executive directors and other members of the senior 
management team. These awards were satisfied using market 
purchased shares held in an employee benefit trust and the 
number of shares awarded to the executive was determined 
by reference to the closing mid-market share price of the 
company’s shares on 29 September 2009 which was 793p 
per share.

Long Term Incentives
The group has for many years operated a number of long-term 
performance related incentive arrangements. These include:

•	

The 2009 

LTIP;

•	

The 2004 

LTIP;

•	

The 1995 Executive Share Option Scheme (the 
Scheme”); and

“1995 

•	

The SAYE Scheme.

2009 LTIP
The 2009 LTIP is delivered through an annual award of 
conditional shares (or nil cost options or restricted shares) with 
a face value of up to 200% of base salary. The Committee 
decides annually the actual size of individual awards.  
The shares vest after three years subject to the following 
performance targets:

•	

•	

•	

33.3% of the award will be subject to absolute TSR growth;

33.3% of the award will be subject to 
and

adjusted EPS growth; 

33.3% of the award will be subject to a balanced scorecard 
of strategic goals.

Executive director 
Preben Prebensen1 
Stephen Hodges 
Jonathan Howell 

Total bonus 
£1,285,000 
£1,000,000 
£950,000 

2009/2010 bonus

Cash 
£475,000 
£367,500 
£360,000 

Deferred 
£810,000 
£632,500 
£590,000 

2008/2009 bonus

Total bonus 
– 
£920,000 
£900,000 

Cash 
– 
£552,000 
£540,000 

Deferred 
– 
£368,000 
£360,000 

1Preben Prebensen joined the group on 1 April 2009 and so did not receive a bonus in 2009.

Increase/ 
decrease in
bonus from
prior year
%
–
9
6

U09509_pp27_pp49.indd   42

29/9/10   20:50:40

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

43

The performance conditions under the 2004 LTIP are a range 
of EPS growth targets for two thirds of an award and relative 
TSR targets for the remaining one third. Performance criteria 
will be calculated by the Committee and independently verified 
by external advisers.

2004 LTIP EPS Element Vesting Criteria
Earnings per share 
growth per annum 

Proportion of maximum
award released

RPI + 10% or more 
Between RPI + 10%  
and RPI + 5% 
RPI + 5% 
Less than RPI + 5% 

100%
Straight line scale between 
100% and 25%
25%
0%

2004 LTIP TSR Element Vesting Criteria
For the TSR element, performance is measured against a 
group of companies drawn from the FTSE 350 General 
Financial Index and the FTSE 350 Banks Index. For the LTIP 
grants in 2006 and 2007, the comparator group consisted of 
the following companies:

•	Aberdeen Asset Management  •	Invesco
•	Investec
•	Alliance & Leicester 
•	Lloyds Banking Group
•	Barclays 
•	London Stock Exchange
•	Bradford & Bingley 
•	Man Group
•	Cattles 
• Collins Stewart1 
•	Northern Rock
•		Paragon Group of Companies
•	F&C Asset Management 
•	Hargreaves Lansdown2 
•	Provident Financial
•	Rathbone Brothers
•	HBOS 
•	Royal Bank of Scotland
•	Henderson Group 
•	Schroders
•	ICAP 
•	Tullett Prebon1
•	Intermediate Capital Group 
1 Collins Stewart and Tullett Prebon (having demerged from Collins Stewart Tullett) were 
added to the 2007 comparator group in place of the pre-demerged entity which was 
included in the 2006 comparator group.
2 Hargreaves Lansdown was added to the 2007 comparator group.

For the 2004 LTIP grant in 2008, the Committee included all 
companies in the FTSE 350 General Financial Index and the 
FTSE 350 Banks Index in the comparator group at the date of 
grant which was 7 October 2008.

TSR performance within 
comparator group 

Top 20% and above 
Between top 20% and median 

Median 
Below median 

Proportion of maximum
award released

100%
Straight line scale between 
100% and 25%
25%
0%

Targets for the 2009 LTIP award are:

Absolute TSR

Absolute TSR growth 
over three years 

20% p.a. or greater 

Between 20% p.a. 
and 10% p.a. 
10% p.a. 

Straight-line between  
these points 
25% 

Less than 10% p.a. 

0% 

EPS

Vesting % of  
TSR element 

Vested award for executive
directors (% salary)

100% 

66.67% 
(200% award x 100% 
vesting x 1/3 weighting)
Straight-line between 
these points
16.67% 
(200% award x 25%  
vesting x 1/3 weighting)
0%

Adjusted EPS growth 
over three years 

Vesting % of  
EPS element 

Vested award for executive
directors (% salary)

RPI + 10% p.a. or greater 

100% 

Between RPI + 10% 
p.a. and RPI + 3% 
RPI + 3% p.a. 

Straight-line between  
these points 
25% 

Less than RPI + 3% p.a. 

0% 

66.67% 
(200% award x 100% 
 vesting x 1/3 weighting)
Straight-line between 
these points
16.67% 
(200% award x 25% 
vesting x 1/3 weighting)
0%

Strategic goals
The board has agreed a number of long-term business 
improvement goals focusing on:

•	

Strategic priorities;

•	

People;

•	

Capital and balance sheet management;

•	

Risk, compliance and controls; and

•	

Financial 

key performance indicators.

The Committee believes that during the year under review 
management made progress in each of the five areas 
identified above. However, further material progress would 
need to be made in each of the five areas over the next two 
years for this part of the award to vest in full.

The Committee will assess management’s progress towards 
achieving these goals against agreed milestones and 
performance criteria over the performance period. The  
goals concentrate management’s efforts on integrating the 
operations of the group, improving efficiencies and processes, 
and improving the scalability of the group.

Details of awards made during the year to the executive 
directors are set out in the table on page 46.

2004 LTIP
The 2004 LTIP was based on a conditional award of free 
shares the vesting of which is subject to demanding 
performance conditions. Grants were restricted to a maximum 
of twice an individual’s base salary in any one year. 
Performance conditions for each award were determined by 
the Committee at the time of each grant. Performance is 
measured over a single period of three years with no re-testing. 
The last awards made under this plan were in October 2008.

U09509_pp27_pp49.indd   43

29/9/10   20:50:40

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Governance

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration
continued

44

1995 Scheme
Under the 1995 Scheme 50% of each grant of options has 
been subject to a performance condition requiring average 
EPS growth of RPI +4% per annum over any three year period 
during the ten year life of the option. The remaining 50% has 
been subject to the achievement of a performance condition 
requiring the company’s EPS growth over any five year period 
during the life of the option to be in the top 25% of FTSE 100 
companies. No awards have been granted under this scheme 
since 2004.

SAYE Scheme
Executive directors are eligible to participate in the SAYE 
Scheme on the same terms as other employees under which 
options are granted for a fixed contract period of three or  
five years, usually at a discount of 20% to the mid-market 
price. The group intends to operate this plan during the 2011 
financial year.

Pensions
Preben Prebensen and Jonathan Howell participated in 
defined contribution pension schemes or received an 
allowance equivalent to the company’s pension contribution 
rate in lieu thereof.

Stephen Hodges participates in the group’s defined benefits 
pension scheme which provides that the normal pensionable 
age is 65, the pension at normal pensionable age is two thirds 
of final pensionable salary subject to completion of 30 years’ 
service and there is a 50% widow’s pension on death. 
Pensionable salary for executive directors who participated in 
the group’s defined benefits pension scheme was set at their 
salary at 1 August 2001 plus increases to reflect RPI to a 
maximum of 2% per annum from 1 August 2002. The scheme 
was closed to new entrants in August 1996.

The company contribution rate for the group’s defined benefits 
pension scheme was determined by the scheme actuary and 
was 31.5% per annum of pensionable salary, effective from 
April 2010.

The table on page 46 summarises pension benefits from the 
group’s defined benefits pension scheme for the executive 
director who participated in the scheme. The accrued pension 
is that which would be paid annually on retirement based on 
service to the end of the year. The transfer value has been 
calculated on the basis of actuarial advice in accordance with 
Actuarial Guidance Note GN11 and represents potential 
liabilities of the group’s defined benefits pension scheme in 
respect of the relevant executive director and does not 
necessarily represent a sum paid or payable to the executive 
director.

External Appointments
Any external appointments require board approval. Any fees 
from such appointments will be taken into account when 
determining the remuneration of an executive director. None of 
the executive directors held any external directorships during 
the year.

Executive Directors’ Service Contracts
In the event of termination of a contract it is current policy to 
seek appropriate mitigation of loss by the director concerned 
and to ensure that any payment made is commensurate with 
the company’s legal obligations. Contracts do not contain 
liquidated damages clauses on termination. The notice period 
stated in the service contract of each current executive 
director, and the date that contract was entered into, are  
as follows:

Date of agreement 

Notice period

Preben Prebensen 

9 February 2009 

Stephen Hodges 

22 January 2001 

Jonathan Howell 

8 October 2007 

12 months notice from the company  
12 months notice from director
12 months notice from the company  
12 months notice from director
12 months notice from the company  
12 months notice from director

All of the current executive directors are entitled to 100% of 
annual salary and the value of other benefits as compensation 
on termination by the company without notice or cause.

Directors’ Interests
The interests of the directors in the ordinary shares of the 
company are set out below.

Shares 
Bruce Carnegie-Brown 
Jamie Cayzer-Colvin 
Ray Greenshields 
Stephen Hodges 
Jonathan Howell 
Strone Macpherson 
Douglas Paterson 
Preben Prebensen 

Ordinary shares

1 August
2009
10,000

31 July  
2010 
10,000 
– –
3,000 –

  593,573  693,469
15,664

39,967 
– –
12,000 
  116,721 

12,000
75,135

Stephen Hodges holds shareholdings in excess of twice his 
base salary. Preben Prebensen and Jonathan Howell have 
made significant investments during 2010 towards reaching 
this threshold.

U09509_pp27_pp49.indd   44

29/9/10   20:50:40

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Colin Keogh
As highlighted in the 2009 Annual Report, former chief 
executive Colin Keogh stepped down as a director on 1 April 
2009. The Committee implemented a tailored incentive 
arrangement to facilitate his retention and incentivisation until a 
successor was found (“Special Incentive”). The Special 
Incentive was a conditional cash award of up to £750,000, the 
vesting of which was subject to the satisfaction of certain 
performance targets. As outlined in the 2009 Annual Report 
the Committee concluded the performance targets were met 
in full, and as a result, the final £375,000 of the Special 
Incentive was paid on 1 April 2010.

Chairman and Non-executive Directors
The chairman and the non-executive directors are engaged 
under a letter of appointment for terms not exceeding three 
years, which are renewable by mutual agreement and 
terminable without notice. In respect of the services of Jamie 
Cayzer-Colvin as non-executive director for the year ended 
31 July 2010, Caledonia Investments plc was paid £47,500, as 
disclosed in the remuneration table below.

The letters of appointment of the chairman and non-executive 
directors are available for inspection.

45

The chairman and non-executive directors are not eligible to 
participate in the share option schemes and their service is  
not pensionable.

The following table shows non-executive fees for the year to 
31 July 2010. These are reviewed annually and have not 
increased since August 2007.

Chairman 
Non-executive director 
Supplements
Senior independent director 
Chairman of Audit Committee 
Chairman of Remuneration Committee   
Chairman of Nomination 
  and Governance Committee 

Non-executive fees
  £180,000
  £47,500

  £10,000
  £15,000
  £10,000

–

Directors’ Remuneration – Audited
The following table shows the remuneration of each director for the year to 31 July 2010

Salaries 
and fees 
£’000 

Allowances1 
£’000 

Other 
benefits2 
£’000 

Annual bonus 

Total 

Company pension
contributions

Cash 
£’000 

Deferred 
£’000 

2010 
£’000 

2009 
£’000 

2010 
£’000 

2009
£’000

Executive director
Stephen Hodges 
Jonathan Howell3 
Preben Prebensen4 
Non-executive director
Bruce Carnegie-Brown 
Jamie Cayzer-Colvin 
Ray Greenshields 
Strone Macpherson 
Douglas Paterson 

368 
360 
475 

68 
48 
48 
180 
63 

27 

125 

4 
16 
3 

368 
360 
475 

633 
590 
810 

1,400 
1,326 
1,888 

1,322 
1,280 
198 

95 
81 

92
81

68 
48 
48 
180 
63 

68
48
34
180
63

1,610 

152 

23 

1,203 

2,033 

5,021 

3,193 

176 

173

1 Allowances received by the directors include an allowance in lieu of a company car. Stephen Hodges receives a cash allowance due to capped employer pension contributions. 
Preben Prebensen receives an allowance in place of the company’s pension contribution rate in lieu of pension contributions.
2Other benefits include healthcare cover, a company car and fuel.
3Payment equivalent to the company’s pension contribution rate is made into Jonathan Howell’s defined contribution pension plan.
4Preben Prebensen was appointed a director on 1 April 2009.

U09509_pp27_pp49.indd   45

29/9/10   20:50:40

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Governance

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration
continued

46

Defined Pension Benefits – Audited
The following table shows the defined pension benefits of Stephen Hodges.

Stephen Hodges 

At 
31 July 2009 
£’000 
2,173 

Transfer value of accrued pension 

Actual increase 
Director’s  excluding director’s 
contribution 
£’000 
539 

contributions 
£’000 
17 

At 
31 July 2010 
£’000 
2,729 

Accrued pension

Increase 
during 
the year 
£’000 
9 

At
31 July 2010
£’000
159

Note: The accrued pension at 31 July 2010 represents the deferred pension to which the director would have been entitled had he left the group on 31 July 2010.

The real increase of the accrued pension transfer value excluding director’s contribution was £435,000.

Directors’ Deferred Share Awards and LTIP Awards
The deferred share award forms part of the annual performance related award and consists of the right for an executive to call for 
shares in the company from the employee benefit trust, at nil cost, together with a cash amount representing accrued notional 
dividends thereon. If the executive leaves employment in certain circumstances prior to 1 August immediately preceding the 
vesting date those entitlements will lapse. Following vesting, these shares may be called for at any time up to the seventh 
anniversary of grant. The value of the awards is charged to the group’s income statement in the year to which the award relates 
for deferred share awards, and spread over the vesting period for LTIP awards.

The deferred share awards held by each director at 31 July 2010 and the LTIP awards which are held by directors under the 2009 
LTIP and 2004 LTIP and are subject to the performance criteria described in this report under “2009 LTIP” and “2004 LTIP” on 
pages 42 and 43, were:

Directors’ Deferred Share Awards (“DSA”) and Long Term Incentive Plan Awards (“LTIP”) – Audited1

Stephen Hodges
2007 DSA 
2008 DSA 
2009 DSA 

Held at 
1 August 
2009 

43,591 
51,214 

Awarded 

Called 

Lapsed 

43,591 

46,406 

Held at 
31 July 
2010 

– 
51,214 
46,406 

Value at 
31 July 
2010 
£ 

– 
344,158 
311,848 

Market 
price on 
award 
p 

807.5 
535.0 
793.0 

Market 
price on 
calling 
p 

  Dividends 
paid on 
 vested 
shares 
£ 

Earliest
vesting date

791.0 

49,650 1 September 2009
 1 September 2010
 1 September 2011

94,805 

46,406 

43,591 

– 

97,620 

656,006 

49,650 

2004 LTIP–2006 Award1 
2004 LTIP–2007 Award 
2004 LTIP–2008 Award 
2009 LTIP–2009 Award 

52,673 
86,069 
131,414 

105,339 

15,841 

36,832 

– 
86,069 
131,414 
105,339 

– 
578,384 
883,102 
707,878 

1008.5 
823.0 
559.3 
699.0 

791.0 

24,014  2 October 2009
  2 October 2010
  7 October 2011
18 November 2012

270,156 

105,339 

15,841 

36,832 

322,822  2,169,364 

24,014

Jonathan Howell
2008 DSA 
2009 DSA 

19,626 

45,397 

19,626 
45,397 

131,887 
305,068 

535.0 
793.0 

 1 September 2010
 1 September 2011

19,626 

45,397 

– 

– 

65,023 

436,955 

2004 LTIP–2007 Award 
2004 LTIP–2008 Award 
2009 LTIP–2009 Award 

113,207 
128,732 

103,049 

113,207 
128,732 
103,049 

760,751 
865,079 
692,489 

612.0 
559.3 
699.0 

4 March 2011
  7 October 2011
18 November 2012

Preben Prebensen
2009 LTIP–2009 Award 

241,939 

103,049 

135,967 

– 

135,967 

– 

– 

– 

344,988  2,318,319 

135,967 

913,698 

699.0 

 18 November 2012

– 

135,967 

913,698

1 The 2006 LTIP award was tested in October 2009 against the performance conditions set by the Committee at the time the award was made. As a result of this performance testing, the 
minimum 5% real EPS growth target (covering two thirds of the award) was not met whilst the TSR performance was between the median and top 20% of the comparator group, 
warranting the vesting of 90.22% of the shares subject to this part of the award. Accordingly some 70% of the original 2006 award shares lapsed during the year.

Note: The market price on award and at vesting is required to be disclosed by Regulation 11 and Schedule 8 of the Large and Medium-Sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and 
Reports) Regulations 2008.

U09509_pp27_pp49.indd   46

29/9/10   20:50:40

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Directors’ Share Option Entitlements – Audited
Share option entitlements, other than SAYE options, are subject to the performance criteria described in this report under the 
“1995 Scheme” section on page 44. Unexercised options over ordinary shares held by directors under the 1995 Scheme and 
SAYE Scheme were:

47

Stephen Hodges
1999 
1999 
2000 
2000 
2000 
2000 
2001 
2001 
2002 
2002 
2003 
2003 
2008 SAYE 

Held at 
1 August 
2009 

38,676 
38,676 
1,333 
26,126 
1,333 
26,126 
36,097 
36,097 
46,411 
46,411 
56,724 
56,724 
2,242 

Exercised 

Lapsed 

Held at 
31 July 
2010 

Exercise 
price 
p 

38,676 
38,676 

– 
– 
1,333 
26,126 
1,333 
26,126 
36,097 
36,097 
46,411 
46,411 
56,724 
56,724 
2,242 

755.8 
755.8 
1125.0 
1090.8 
1125.0 
1090.8 
542.9 
542.9 
436.3 
436.3 
710.2 
710.2 
428.0 

Market
price on
exercise
p 

791.0 
791.0 

From 

To

3 November 2002 
3 November 2004 
23 October 2003 
23 October 2003 
23 October 2005 
23 October 2005 
26 September 2004 
26 September 2006 
8 October 2005 
8 October 2007 
7 October 2006 
7 October 2008 
1 December 2011 

2 November 2009
2 November 2009
22 October 2010
22 October 2010
22 October 2010
22 October 2010
25 September 2011
25 September 2011
7 October 2012
7 October 2012
6 October 2013
6 October 2013
31 May 2012

412,976 

77,352 

– 

335,624

Note: The figures shown reflect the adjustment to share option entitlements arising from the special dividend payment made on 6 November 2007.

Directors’ Matching Share Awards (“MSA”) and Restricted Share Awards (“RSA”) – Audited
The MSA was granted to Preben Prebensen shortly after joining the group in 2009. The vesting of this award is subject to a 
personal investment in shares of £500,000, satisfaction of the same performance conditions as the 2009 LTIP and continued 
employment until the vesting date.

The RSA was granted to Preben Prebensen in May 2009 in compensation for share awards which were forfeited on leaving his 
previous employer. The three tranches vest following announcement of the Company’s interim results for the financial years 2010 
(25%), 2011 (50%) and 2012 (25%) subject to continued employment until the vesting date.

Preben Prebensen
2009 MSA 
2009 MSA 
2009 MSA 
2009 MSA 

2009 RSA 
2009 RSA 
2009 RSA 

Awarded 

Called 

Held at 
1 August 
2009 

65,902 
65,902 
65,902 
65,902 

Held at 
31 July 
2010 

65,902 
65,902 
65,902 
65,902 

Value at
31 July 
2010 
£ 

442,861 
442,861 
442,861 
442,861 

263,608 

– 

– 

263,608 

1,771,444

27,924 
55,848 
27,924 

27,924 

– 
55,848 
27,924 

111,696 

– 

27,924 

83,772 

– 
375,299 
187,649 

562,948

Earliest
vesting
date

September 2011
September 2012
September 2013
September 2014

1 March 2010
1 March 2011
1 March 2012

U09509_pp27_pp49.indd   47

29/9/10   20:50:41

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Governance

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration
continued

48

Total Shareholder Return
The graph below shows a comparison of TSR for the Company’s shares for the five years ended 31 July 2010 against the TSR for 
the companies comprising the FTSE 250 Index. TSR has been calculated assuming that all dividends are reinvested on their 
ex-dividend date. The index has been selected because the Company has been a constituent of the index throughout the period.

FTSE 250 TSR

Close Brothers TSR

180

160

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

July 2005

July 2006

July 2007

July 2008

July 2009

 July 2010 

Note: This graph shows the value, by 31 July 2010, of £100 invested in Close Brothers Group plc on 31 July 2005 compared with the value of £100 invested in the FTSE 250 Index. 
The other points plotted are the values at intervening financial year ends.

Source: Thomson Reuters Datastream

The closing mid-market price of the Company’s shares on 31 July 2010 was 672p and the range during the year was 666p  
to 796.5p.

Approval
This report was approved by the board of directors on 28 September 2010 and signed on its behalf by:

B. N. Carnegie-Brown 
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee

U09509_pp27_pp49.indd   48

29/9/10   20:50:41

Financial Statements

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Report of the Auditors

Independent Auditors’ Report to the Members of  
Close Brothers Group plc
We have audited the financial statements of Close Brothers 
Group plc for the year ended 31 July 2010 which comprise the 
group Income Statement, the group and parent company 
Balance Sheets, the group Cash Flow Statement, the group 
Statement of Recognised Income and Expense, the group 
Statement of Changes in Equity and the related notes 1 to 34. 
The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the 
preparation of the group financial statements is applicable law 
and International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRSs”) as 
adopted by the European Union. The financial reporting 
framework that has been applied in the preparation of the 
parent company financial statements is applicable law and 
United Kingdom Accounting Standards (United Kingdom 
Generally Accepted Accounting Practice).

This report is made solely to the company’s members, as a 
body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the 
Companies Act 2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so 
that we might state to the company’s members those matters 
we are required to state to them in an auditors’ report and for 
no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do 
not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the 
company and the company’s members as a body, for our 
audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.

Respective responsibilities of directors and auditors
As explained more fully in the Directors’ Responsibilities 
Statement, the directors are responsible for the preparation of 
the financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a 
true and fair view. Our responsibility is to audit the financial 
statements in accordance with applicable law and International 
Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland). Those standards 
require us to comply with the Auditing Practices Board’s 
Ethical Standards for Auditors.

Scope of the audit of the financial statements
An audit involves obtaining evidence about the amounts and 
disclosures in the financial statements sufficient to give 
reasonable assurance that the financial statements are free 
from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud or error. 
This includes an assessment of: whether the accounting 
policies are appropriate to the group’s and the parent 
company’s circumstances and have been consistently applied 
and adequately disclosed; the reasonableness of significant 
accounting estimates made by the directors; and the overall 
presentation of the financial statements.

Opinion on financial statements
In our opinion:

•	

•	

•	

The financial statements give a true and fair view of the state 
of the group’s and of the parent company’s affairs as at 31 
July 2010 and of the group’s profit for the year then ended;

The group financial statements have been properly 
prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the 
European Union;

The parent company financial statements have been 
properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom 
Generally Accepted Accounting Practice; and

49

•	

The financial statements have been prepared in accordance 
with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006; and, as 
regards the group financial statements, Article 4 of the IAS 
Regulation.

Opinion on other matters prescribed by the Companies 
Act 2006
In our opinion:

•	

•	

The part of the Report of the Board on Directors’ 
Remuneration to be audited has been properly prepared in 
accordance with the Companies Act 2006; and

The information given in the Report of the Directors for the 
financial year for which the financial statements are 
prepared is consistent with the financial statements.

Matters on which we are required to report by 
exception
We have nothing to report in respect of the following: 

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to 
you if, in our opinion:

•	

•	

•	

•	

Adequate accounting records have not been kept by the 
parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have not 
been received from branches not visited by us; or

The parent company financial statements and the part of 
the Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration to be 
audited are not in agreement with the accounting records 
and returns; or

Certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by 
law are not made; or

We have not received all the information and explanations 
we require for our audit.

Under the Listing Rules we are required to review:

•	

•	

The directors’ statement contained within 
Governance in relation to going concern; and

Corporate 

The part of 
Corporate Governance relating to the 
company’s compliance with the nine provisions of the June 
2008 Combined Code specified for our review.

Kari Hale (Senior Statutory Auditor)
for and on behalf of Deloitte LLP
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors
London, United Kingdom

28 September 2010

An audit does not provide assurance on the maintenance and integrity of the website, including controls used to achieve this, and in particular on whether any changes 
may have occurred to the financial statements since first published. These matters are the responsibility of the directors but no control procedures can provide absolute 
assurance in this area. Legislation in the United Kingdom governing the preparation and dissemination of financial statements differs from legislation in other jurisdictions.

Financial Statements
Financial Statements

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Consolidated Income Statement
for the year ended 31 July 2010

50

Continuing operations
Interest income 
Interest expense 

Net interest income 

Fee and commission income   
Fee and commission expense  
Gains less losses arising from dealing in securities 
Share of profit of associates 
Other income 

Non-interest income 

Operating income 

Administrative expenses 
Impairment losses on loans and advances 
Impairment losses on goodwill  
Impairment on investment assets 
Amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition 

Total operating expenses before exceptional items, goodwill impairment
  and amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition 
Exceptional items 
Impairment losses on goodwill  
Amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition 

Total operating expenses 

Operating profit before exceptional items, goodwill impairment and
  amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition and tax 
Exceptional items 
Impairment losses on goodwill  
Amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition 

Operating profit before tax  
Tax 

Profit after tax from continuing operations  
Profit for the period from discontinued operations 
Profit attributable to minority interests from continuing operations 
Profit attributable to minority interests from discontinued operations 

Profit attributable to the shareholders of the company 

From continuing operations
Basic earnings per share 
Diluted earnings per share 

From continuing and discontinued operations
Basic earnings per share 
Diluted earnings per share 

Ordinary dividend per share 

Note 

2010 
£ million 

2009
£ million

4 

309.8 
(114.3) 

352.8
(171.0)

195.5 

181.8

183.1 
(19.7) 
141.9 
5.7 
25.2 

171.4
(19.7)
140.2
16.1
12.3

336.2 

320.3

531.7 

502.1

347.0 
63.4 
6.5 
15.0 –
0.5 

410.4 
15.0 
6.5 
0.5 

334.5
59.9
19.0

0.4

388.4
6.0
19.0
0.4

432.4 

413.8

121.3 
(15.0) 
(6.5) 
(0.5) 

113.7
(6.0)
(19.0)
(0.4)

99.3 
32.8 

66.5 
– 
0.6 
– 

65.9 

88.3
26.1

62.2
10.4
0.3
0.6

71.7

46.0p 
45.2p 

43.6p
43.2p

46.0p 
45.2p 

50.5p
50.0p

4 
12 
16 
5 

5 
16 

5 
16 

7 

8 

9 
9 

9 
9 

10 

39.0p 

39.0p

U09509_pp50_pp55.indd   50

29/9/10   20:50:55

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Consolidated Statement of Recognised  
Income and Expense
for the year ended 31 July 2010

Profit after tax 
Currency translation gains 
Gains/(losses) on cash flow hedging 
Other losses 
Gains/(losses) on financial instruments classified as available for sale:
Gilts and government guaranteed debt 
Floating rate notes 
Equity shares 
Transfer to income statement on impairment of available for sale equity shares 

Total recognised income and expense 

Attributable to:
Minority interests 
Shareholders 

51

2010 
£ million 
66.5 
5.1 
6.1 
(4.4) 

(0.2) 
19.0 
(2.8) 
15.0 –
37.8 

2009
£ million
72.6
18.8
(11.1)
(2.8)

0.6
(15.2)
(8.8)

(18.5)

104.3 

54.1

0.6 
103.7 

0.9
53.2

U09509_pp50_pp55.indd   51

29/9/10   20:50:55

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial Statements

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Consolidated Balance Sheet
at 31 July 2010

52

Assets
Cash and balances at central banks 
Settlement balances 
Loans and advances to banks  
Loans and advances to customers 
Debt securities 
Equity shares 
Loans to money brokers against stock advanced 
Derivative financial instruments  
Interests in associates 
Intangible assets 
Property, plant and equipment  
Deferred tax assets 
Prepayments, accrued income and other assets 

Total assets 

Liabilities
Settlement balances and short positions   
Deposits by banks 
Deposits by customers 
Loans and overdrafts from banks 
Debt securities in issue 
Loans from money brokers against stock advanced   
Derivative financial instruments  
Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities 
Subordinated loan capital 

Total liabilities 

Equity
Called up share capital 
Share premium account 
Profit and loss account 
Other reserves 

Total shareholders’ equity   

Minority interests in equity  

Total equity 

Total liabilities and equity 

Note 

2010 
£ million 

2009
£ million

452.7 
541.7 
158.5 

1.7
508.7
11 
196.5
12  2,912.6  2,364.9
13  1,636.2  2,299.2
59.9 
62.0
14 
158.3
86.0 
32.5
23.0 
73.7 
71.9
107.6
107.5 
41.6
46.2 
32.8 
32.6
141.8
128.8 

15 
27 
16 
17 
18 
19 

  6,259.6  6,019.3

20 
565.1 
590.7
48.0
48.1 
21 
21  3,115.5  2,919.6
21  1,178.4  1,340.5
21.4
21 

218.6 
32.7 –
20.5 
251.3 
75.0 

21.9
304.5
75.0

15 
19 
22 

  5,505.2  5,321.6

23 

37.4 
275.9 
457.3 
(18.7) 

37.4
274.5
445.7
(64.2)

751.9 

693.4

2.5 

4.3

754.4 

697.7

  6,259.6  6,019.3

Approved and authorised for issue by the Board of Directors on 28 September 2010 and signed on its behalf by:

P.S.S. Macpherson 
Chairman 

P. Prebensen
Chief Executive

U09509_pp50_pp55.indd   52

29/9/10   20:50:55

Registered Number: 520241

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity
for the year ended 31 July 2010

Other reserves

Share 
premium 
account 
£ million 
274.1 
– 

Profit 

Available 
for sale 
and loss  movements 
reserve 
account 
£ million 
£ million 
(12.3) 
432.0 
– 
71.7 

Share- 
Exchange 
based  movements 
reserve 
£ million 
2.3 
– 

reserves 
£ million 
(19.4) 
– 

Cash flow 
hedging 
reserve 
£ million 
1.4 
– 

Total
attributable
to equity 
holders 
£ million 
715.4 
71.7 

Minority 
interests 
£ million 
5.0 
0.9 

Total
equity
£ million
720.4
72.6

53

Called up 
share 
capital 
£ million 
37.3 
– 

– 

– 
0.1 
– 
– 
– 
– 

– 

(2.8) 

(23.4) 

– 

18.8 

(11.1) 

(18.5) 

– 

(18.5)

– 
0.4 
– 
– 
– 
– 

68.9 
– 
(55.2) 
– 
– 
– 

(23.4) 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

– 
– 
– 
(22.1) 
4.3 
(0.2) 

18.8 
– 
– 
– 
– 
(2.5) 

(11.1) 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

53.2 
0.5 
(55.2) 
(22.1) 
4.3 
(2.7) 

0.9 
– 
– 
– 
– 
(1.6) 

54.1
0.5
(55.2)
(22.1)
4.3
(4.3)

At 1 August 2008 
Profit for the period 
Other recognised income/ 
 ( expense) for the period 
Total recognised income/
(expense) for the period 

Exercise of options 
Dividends paid 
Shares purchased 
Shares released 
Other movements 

At 31 July 2009 

37.4 

274.5 

445.7 

(35.7) 

(37.4) 

18.6 

(9.7) 

693.4 

4.3 

697.7

Profit for the period 
Other recognised income/
(expense) for the period 
Total recognised income/
(expense) for the period 

Exercise of options 
Dividends paid 
Shares purchased 
Shares released 
Other movements 

– 

– 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

– 

– 

– 
1.4 
– 
– 
– 
– 

65.9 

– 

(4.4) 

31.0 

61.5 
– 
(55.5) 
– 
– 
5.6 

31.0 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

– 

– 

– 
– 
– 
(2.3) 
9.5 
(3.9) 

– 

5.1 

5.1 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

– 

65.9 

6.1 

6.1 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

37.8 

103.7 
1.4 
(55.5) 
(2.3) 
9.5 
1.7 

0.6 

– 

0.6 
– 
– 
– 
– 
(2.4) 

66.5

37.8

104.3
1.4
(55.5)
(2.3)
9.5
(0.7)

At 31 July 2010 

37.4 

275.9 

457.3 

(4.7) 

(34.1) 

23.7 

(3.6) 

751.9 

2.5 

754.4

U09509_pp50_pp55.indd   53

29/9/10   20:50:55

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial Statements

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Consolidated Cash Flow Statement
for the year ended 31 July 2010

54

Net cash outflow from operating activities  

Net cash outflow from investing activities:
Dividends received from associates 
Purchase of:
  Assets let under operating leases 
  Property, plant and equipment 

Intangible assets 

  Equity shares held for investment 
  Own shares for employee share award schemes   
  Minority interests 
  Loan book 
  Subsidiaries and associates  
Sale of:
  Property, plant and equipment 
  Equity shares held for investment 
  Subsidiaries 

Net cash outflow before financing 

Financing activities:
Issue of ordinary share capital, net of transaction costs 
Equity dividends paid 
Dividends paid to minority interests 
Interest paid on subordinated loan capital  
Reclassification of floating rate notes classified as available for sale 
Debt securities issued 

Net decrease in cash 
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year 

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year  

Note 
32(a) 

2010 
£ million 
(135.1) 

2009
£ million
(168.8)

8.2 

19.6

(12.6) 
(8.5) 
(4.7) 
(0.2) 
(2.3) 
(4.0) 
(97.8) 
(0.4) 

2.2 
3.3 
– 

(12.4)
(8.8)
(1.8)
(3.4)
(22.1)
(0.6)
(9.1)
(19.7)

1.9
1.0
51.1

(116.8) 

(4.3)

(251.9) 

(173.1)

1.4 
(55.5) 
(0.7) 
(5.6) 
– 
197.2 

0.5
(55.2)
(1.6)
(5.6)
(751.3)
–

26 
32(b) 

32(c) 

32(d) 

(115.1) 

(986.3)
  1,398.3  2,384.6

32(e)  1,283.2  1,398.3

U09509_pp50_pp55.indd   54

29/9/10   20:50:55

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Company Balance Sheet
at 31 July 2010

Fixed assets
Intangible assets 
Property, plant and equipment  
Investments in subsidiaries 
Interest free loan to subsidiary   

Current assets:
Cash at bank 
Amounts owed by subsidiaries  
Other investments 
Corporation tax receivable 
Deferred tax asset 
Other debtors 

Creditors: Amounts falling due within one year:
Amounts owed to subsidiaries  
Accruals and deferred income  
Provisions 
Bank loans and overdrafts 
Other creditors 

Net current assets 

Total assets less current liabilities 
Creditors: Amounts falling due after more than one year:
Debt securities in issue 
Interest free loan from subsidiary with no fixed repayment date   

Net assets 

Capital and reserves
Share capital 
Share premium account 
Profit and loss account 
Other reserves 

Total equity shareholders’ funds 

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Note 

2010 
£ million 

2009
£ million

55

16 
17 
26 

18 

19 

0.2 –
3.2 
287.0 
377.3 

2.2
287.0
392.0

667.7 

681.2

0.5 
412.9 

11.2 1
7.1 
3.3 
1.9 

0.7
133.7
6.6
0.6
4.8
0.8

436.9 

157.2

6.2 
5.9 
7.4 
100.0 –
8.3 

7.1
5.9
8.7

6.4

127.8 

28.1

309.1 

129.1

976.8 8

10.3

197.8 –
17.9 

17.9

761.1 7

92.4

23 

24 
24 

37.4 
275.9 
477.2 
(29.4) (

37.4
274.5
517.9
37.4)

761.1 7

92.4

Approved and authorised for issue by the Board of Directors on 28 September 2010 and signed on its behalf by:

P.S.S. Macpherson 
Chairman 

P. Prebensen
Chief Executive

U09509_pp50_pp55.indd   55

29/9/10   20:50:56

Registered Number: 520241

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Financial Statements

The Notes
The Notes

56

1. Accounting policies
Close Brothers Group plc (the “Company”) a public limited company incorporated and domiciled in the United Kingdom (UK), 
together with its subsidiaries (collectively, the “group”) operates through three divisions: Banking, Securities and Asset 
Management and is primarily located within the British Isles.

(a) Compliance with financial reporting standards
The consolidated financial statements (“the consolidated accounts”) have been prepared and approved by the directors in 
accordance with all relevant International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”) as issued by the International Accounting 
Standards Board (“IASB”) and adopted by the European Union.

At the balance sheet date the group had adopted all standards and interpretations which had become effective during the year. 
Other than the Standards described below, there was no material impact on the financial statements of the group from adoption 
of effective standards and interpretations.

•	

•	

•	

•	

•	

IFRS 8 “Operating segments” has been adopted. This standard replaces IAS 14 “Segment reporting” and requires segmental 
information reported to be based on that which the group’s Executive Committee, which is considered the group’s chief 
operating decision maker, uses internally for the purposes of evaluating the performance of the group’s operating segments. 
Note 3 of these financial statements sets out the group’s reportable segments and reconciliations between these and the 
results reported in the consolidated income statement and consolidated balance sheet. There has been no change to the 
segments reported, though there have been some additional segmental disclosures presented.

Amendments to IFRS 3 “Business combinations” and IAS 27 “Consolidated and separate financial statements” have been 
adopted. The main changes to existing practice affect acquisitions achieved in stages and those where less than 100% of 
equity is acquired. In addition, acquisition related costs must be accounted for as expenses unless directly connected with the 
issue of debt or equity securities. The revised IFRS 3 applies prospectively to business combinations undertaken by the group 
on or after 1 August 2009.

Amendment to IAS 1 “Presentation of financial statements” has been adopted. The revised standard prohibits the presentation 
of items of income and expense in the statement of changes in equity, requiring non-shareholder changes in equity to be 
presented separately from shareholder changes in equity. All non-shareholder changes in equity are required to be presented 
in a performance statement. IAS 1 (Revised) permits a choice between presenting a single performance statement (being a 
Statement of Comprehensive Income) or two statements (being an Income Statement and a Statement of Recognised Income 
and Expense). The group has elected to present two statements. In addition, to comply with the revised standard, the group 
now presents a Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity as a primary statement.

Amendment to IFRS 7 “Financial instruments: disclosures” which requires enhanced disclosures of fair value and liquidity risk 
has been adopted. This has resulted in additional disclosures in this Annual Report. The group has elected not to provide 
comparative information for these expanded disclosures in the current year in accordance with the transitional reliefs offered in 
the amendment.

orrowing Costs (Revised)” has been revised to require capitalisation of borrowing costs on qualifying assets. In 

IAS 23 “B
accordance with the transitional requirements of the standard, the capitalisation of borrowing costs has been adopted as a 
prospective change from the commencement date of 1 August 2009. No change has been made for borrowing costs incurred 
prior to this date that have been expensed. Since adoption, the group has incurred no borrowing costs on qualifying assets 
which are required to be capitalised.

The following standards, amendments and interpretations have been issued by the International Accounting Standards Board 
(“IASB”) and IFRS Interpretations Committee (“IFRIC”) with an effective date, subject to EU endorsement in some cases, that do 
not impact on these financial statements.

•	

•	

The IASB issued an amendment, 
in June 2009 clarifying how an individual subsidiary in a group should account for share-based payment arrangements in its 
own financial statements where the subsidiary receives goods or services from employees or suppliers but its parent or 
another entity in the group must pay those suppliers. The amendment is effective for annual periods beginning on or after 
1 January 2010. The effect to the group is under review although no material impact is expected.

“Group Cash-settled Share-based Payment Transactions“, to IFRS 2 “Share-based Payment” 

The IASB published an amendment 
consequential revisions to other standards in October 2009 to improve the accounting for issues of equity for consideration 
fixed other than in the reporting entity’s functional currency. The amendment is effective for annual periods beginning on or 
after 1 February 2010. It is not expected to have a material impact on the group.

“Classification of Rights Issues” to IAS 32 “Financial Instruments: Presentation” and 

•	

The IASB reissued IAS 24, 
“Related Party Disclosures”, in November 2009 to clarify the existing standard and provide certain 
exemptions for entities under government control. The revised standard is effective for annual periods beginning on or after 1 
January 2011 and is not expected to have a material impact on the group.

U09509_pp56_pp75.indd   56

29/9/10   20:51:15

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

57

•	

•	

•	

“Financial Instruments” in November 2009 simplifying the classification and measurement 

The IASB issued IFRS 9 
requirements in IAS 39 “Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement” in respect of financial assets. The standard 
reduces the measurement categories for financial assets to two: fair value and amortised cost. A financial asset is classified on 
the basis of the entity’s business model for managing the financial asset and the contractual cash flow characteristics of the 
financial asset. Only assets with contractual terms that give rise to cash flows on specified dates that are solely payments of 
principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding and which are held within a business model whose objective is to 
hold assets in order to collect contractual cash flows are classified as amortised cost. All other financial assets are measured 
at fair value. Changes in the value of financial assets measured at fair value are generally taken to profit or loss although there is 
an exception where an equity investment is not held for trading and an irrevocable election is made at initial recognition to 
measure it at fair value through equity with only dividend income recognised in profit or loss. The standard is effective for 
annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2013; early application is permitted. This standard makes major changes to the 
framework for the classification and measurement of financial assets and will have a significant effect on the group’s financial 
statements. The group is assessing this impact which is likely to depend on the outcome of the other phases of the IASB’s IAS 
39 replacement project.

The IASB issued an amendment to IFRIC 14 
amendment applies in the limited circumstances when an entity is subject to minimum funding requirements and makes an 
early payment of contributions to cover those requirements. It permits such an entity to treat the benefit of such an early 
payment as an asset. The amendment is effective for annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2011 and is not expected 
to have a material impact on the group.

“Prepayments of a Minimum Funding Requirement” in November 2009. The 

The IFRIC issued interpretation IFRIC 19 
“Extinguishing Financial Liabilities with Equity Instruments” in December 2009. The 
interpretation clarifies that the profit or loss on extinguishing liabilities by issuing equity instruments should be measured by 
reference to fair value, preferably of the equity instruments. The interpretation, effective for the group for annual periods 
beginning on or after 1 January 2011, is not expected to have a material effect on the group.

•	 “Improvements to IFRSs” issued in May 2010 contain amendments to a number of IFRSs. The effect to the group is under 

review although no material impact is expected.

The company financial statements (“the company accounts”) have been prepared and approved by the directors in accordance 
with Section 395 of the Companies Act 2006, the Large and Medium sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) 
Regulations 2008 and with all relevant UK accounting standards. The company has taken advantage of the exemption in s408 of 
the Companies Act 2006 not to present its company income statement and related notes.

(b) Accounting convention
The consolidated and company accounts have been prepared under the historical cost convention, except for the revaluation of 
financial assets and liabilities held at fair value through profit or loss, available for sale financial assets and all derivative financial 
instruments (“derivatives”).

The financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis as disclosed in the Report of the Directors.

(c) Basis of consolidation
Subsidiaries
The consolidated accounts incorporate the financial statements of the company and the entities it controls (“subsidiaries”) using 
the acquisition method of accounting. Control exists where the company has the power to govern an entity’s financial and 
operating policies. The results of subsidiaries are included in the consolidated income statement from the date control transfers to 
the company to the date control transfers from the company.

Under the acquisition method of accounting, with some limited exceptions, the assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities of a 
subsidiary are measured at their fair values at the date of acquisition. The interest of minority shareholders is measured either at 
fair value or at the minority’s proportion of the net assets acquired. Acquisition related costs are accounted for as expenses when 
incurred, unless directly related to the issue of debt or equity securities. Any excess of the cost of acquisition over net assets is 
capitalised as goodwill. All intra-group balances, transactions, income and expenses are eliminated. As allowed by IFRS 1 
“First-Time Adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards”), the company has not restated to IFRS fair values those 
acquisitions that took place before 1 August 2004.

Associates
The consolidated accounts also incorporate the financial statements of entities that are neither subsidiaries nor joint ventures but 
over which the company has significant influence (“associates”), using the equity method of accounting. This applies where the 
company and its subsidiaries (“the group”) hold 20% or more of an entity’s voting power, unless it can be clearly demonstrated 
that no significant influence exists. The group’s share of an associate’s results is included in the consolidated income statement 
from the date it becomes an associate to the date it stops being so.

U09509_pp56_pp75.indd   57

29/9/10   20:51:15

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Financial Statements

The Notes

58

1. Accounting policies continued
Under the equity method of accounting, the investment in an associate is initially recognised at cost. This carrying amount 
subsequently decreases for the group’s share of any losses or distributions received and increases for the group’s share of any 
profit. The carrying amount is also reviewed annually for impairment.

(d) Net interest income
Interest on loans and advances made by the group, and fee income and expense and other direct costs relating to loan 
origination, restructuring or commitments are recognised in the income statement using the effective interest rate (“EIR”) method.

The EIR method applies a rate that discounts estimated future cash payments or receipts relating to a financial instrument to its 
net carrying amount. The cash flows take into account all contractual terms of the financial instrument including transaction costs 
and all other premiums or discounts but not future credit losses.

(e) Net fee and commission income
Where fees that have not been included within the EIR method are earned on the execution of a significant act, such as fees 
arising from negotiating or arranging a transaction for a third party, they are recognised as revenue when that act has been 
completed. Fees and corresponding expenses in respect of other services are recognised in the income statement as the right to 
consideration or payment accrues through performance of services. In particular, upfront commissions paid in respect of 
managing, as opposed to originating, fund products are initially included within “accruals and deferred income” and then 
recognised as revenue as the services are provided. To the extent that fees and commissions are recognised in advance of billing 
they are included as accrued income or expense.

(f) Gains less losses arising from dealing in securities
This includes the net gains arising from both buying and selling securities and from positions held in securities, including related 
interest income and dividends.

(g) Share-based awards
The group operates four share-based award schemes, an annual discretionary performance arrangement and three long-term 
equity based incentive schemes (“Incentive Schemes”); the 2009 Long Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”) which replaced the 2004 
Long Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”), the 1995 Executive Share Option Scheme and the Inland Revenue approved Savings Related 
Share Option Scheme. In addition to these schemes a new Share Matching Plan will operate for the first time in the 2011 financial 
year in respect of annual bonuses awarded for the 2010 financial year. As allowed by IFRS 1, the company has not applied IFRS 2 
“Share-based Payment” to grants under these Incentive Schemes before 8 November 2002.

The costs of the annual discretionary performance related awards are based on the salary of the individual at the time the award 
is made. The value of the share award at the grant date is charged to the group’s income statement in the year to which the 
award relates.

The cost of the Incentive Schemes is based on the fair value of awards on the date of grant. Fair values for market based 
performance conditions are determined using a stochastic (Monte Carlo simulation) pricing model for the LTIP and the Black-
Scholes pricing model for the others. Both models take into account the exercise price of the option, the current share price, the 
risk free interest rate, the expected volatility of the company’s share price over the life of the option award and other relevant 
factors. For non market based performance conditions, vesting conditions are not taken into account when measuring fair value, 
but are reflected by adjusting the number of shares in each award such that the amount recognised reflects the number that are 
expected to, and then actually do, vest. The fair value is expensed in the income statement on a straight line basis over the 
vesting period, with a corresponding credit to the share-based awards reserve. At the end of the vesting period, or upon exercise, 
lapse or forfeit if earlier, this credit is transferred to retained reserves. Further information on the group’s schemes are provided in 
note 31, and in the Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration.

(h) Depreciation and amortisation
Property, plant and equipment, computer software and intangible assets on acquisition (latter two classified as “intangible 
assets”), are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation or amortisation, less provisions for any impairment. The provision for 
depreciation or amortisation on these assets is calculated to write off their cost on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful 
lives as follows:

Fixtures, fittings and equipment 
Motor vehicles 
Freehold and long leasehold property 
Short leasehold property 
Computer software 
Intangible assets on acquisition  

No depreciation is provided in respect of freehold land, which is stated at cost.

10% to 33%
25%
2.5%
over the length of the lease
20% to 33%
7% to 20%

U09509_pp56_pp75.indd   58

29/9/10   20:51:15

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

59

(i) Impairment losses on goodwill
Goodwill arising on the acquisition of business assets before 1 August 1998 has been written off to reserves. From that date such 
goodwill arising was capitalised as an intangible asset and amortised, in equal annual instalments, unless there has been 
impairment, over its estimated useful life of up to 20 years. From 1 August 2004, amortisation of goodwill has ceased, negative 
goodwill is credited to the income statement and the net book value of goodwill is subject to impairment review at least annually.

(j) Exceptional items
Items of income and expense that are material by size and/or nature and are non-recurring are classified as exceptional items on 
the face of the income statement. The separate reporting of these items helps give an indication of the group’s underlying 
performance.

(k) Current tax
Current tax is the expected tax payable on the taxable profit for the year. Taxable profit differs from net profit as reported in the 
income statement because it excludes items of income and expense that are taxable or deductible in other years and items that 
are never taxable or deductible. The group’s liability for current tax is calculated using tax rates that have been enacted or 
substantively enacted by the balance sheet date.

(l) Deferred tax
To enable the tax charge to be based on the profit for the year, deferred tax is provided in full on temporary timing differences, at 
the rates of tax expected to apply when these differences crystallise. Deferred tax assets are recognised only to the extent that it 
is probable that sufficient taxable profits will be available against which temporary differences can be set. All deferred tax liabilities 
are offset against deferred tax assets in accordance with the provisions of IAS 12 “Income taxes”.

(m) Settlement accounts
Settlement balance debtors and creditors are the amounts due to and from counterparties in respect of the group’s market-
making activities. The balances are short-term in nature, do not earn interest and are recorded at the amount receivable or 
payable.

(n) Loans and advances to customers
Loans and advances are recognised when cash is advanced to borrowers at cost including any transaction costs and are 
classified as loans and receivables under IAS 39 “Financial instruments: recognition and measurement”. They are then amortised 
using the EIR method and recorded net of provisions for impairment losses. The carrying value of loans and advances 
approximates to their fair value.

Impairment provisions are made if there is objective evidence of impairment as a result of one or more subsequent events 
regarding a significant loan or a portfolio of loans (“a loan”) and its impact can be reliably estimated.

The amount of the loss is measured as the difference between the loan’s carrying amount and the present value of estimated 
future cash flows, excluding future credit losses that have not been incurred, discounted at the original EIR. As the loan amortises 
over its life, the impairment loss may amortise. All impairment losses are reviewed at least at each reporting date. If subsequently 
the amount of the loss decreases as a result of a new event, the relevant element of the outstanding impairment loss is reversed. 
Interest on impaired financial assets is recognised at the original EIR applied to the carrying amount as reduced by an allowance 
for impairment.

For loans that are not considered individually significant, the group adopts a formulaic approach which allocates a loss rate 
dependent on the overdue period. Loss rates are based on the discounted expected future cash flows and are regularly 
benchmarked against actual outcomes to ensure they remain appropriate.

(o) Finance leases, operating leases and hire purchase contracts
A finance lease is a lease or hire purchase contract that transfers substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to ownership of 
an asset to the lessee. Finance leases are recognised as loans at an amount equal to the gross investment in the lease 
discounted at its implicit interest rate. Finance charges on finance leases are taken to income in proportion to the net funds 
invested.

Rental costs under operating leases and hire purchase contracts are charged to the income statement in equal annual amounts 
over the period of the leases.

(p) Debt securities and equity shares
Fair values of all financial instruments are obtained from independent open market sources, independent professional valuers, 
discounted cash flow models based on prevailing market rates or option pricing models.

Financial instruments held for trading

•	
  The long and short positions respectively represent the aggregate net bought and net sold positions, held by Winterflood and 
Close Brothers Seydler Bank (“Seydler”). They are valued at the dealers’ bid and offer prices respectively and are the only 

U09509_pp56_pp75.indd   59

29/9/10   20:51:15

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Financial Statements

The Notes

60

1. Accounting policies continued

financial instruments held for trading. As such they are fair valued through profit or loss and the net gains arising are the only 
items shown within “gains less losses arising from dealing in securities” in the income statement.

Other investments designated at inception under the fair value option

•	
  Listed investments are valued at bid price. Unlisted investments comprise those made in various private equity limited liability 
partnerships. These partnerships themselves typically invest in unquoted companies via equity and loans and value each 
investment semi-annually in compliance with International Private Equity and Venture Capital Valuation Guidelines endorsed by 
the British Private Equity and Venture Capital Association, such valuations being externally audited annually. Further details on 
the valuation methodologies for unlisted investments are included in Note 33 Financial Risk Management on pages 91 to 99.

Floating rate notes held to maturity

•	
  These are investments with fixed or determinable payments that are held with the intention and ability to hold to maturity. They 
are initially recognised at fair value including direct and incremental transaction costs and subsequently valued at amortised 
cost. Amortised cost is the initial amount adjusted for subsequent payments, less cumulative amortisation calculated using the 
EIR method. The resulting balance is reduced for amounts which are considered to be impaired or uncollectible.

Financial instruments classified as available for sale

•	
  These are recognised at fair value plus any directly attributable purchase costs, with changes being accounted for through 

equity. If such an asset is sold or there is objective evidence that it is impaired, the cumulative gains and losses recognised in 
equity are recycled to the income statement. In subsequent periods if the fair value of an available for sale debt security 
increases due to an event which occurred after the impairment loss was recognised, the impairment loss is reversed through 
the income statement. Impairment losses on available for sale equity instruments are not reversed through the income 
statement but are recognised directly in equity.

Certificates of deposit classified as loans and receivables under IAS 39

•	
  These are purchased for liquidity purposes and normally held to maturity. They are unlisted and due to mature within one year 

and are valued at amortised cost.

Equity shares held by the employee benefit trust

•	
  These are held at cost and shown within equity as part of “Share-based reserves”. Realised surpluses and deficits are not 

taken to the income statement.

(q) Loans to and from money brokers against stock advanced
Loans to money brokers against stock advanced are the cash collateral provided to these institutions for stock borrowing by the 
group’s market-making activities. Interest is paid on the stock borrowed and earned on the cash deposits held. The stock 
borrowing to which the cash deposits relate is short-term in nature and is recorded at the amount receivable. Loans from money 
brokers against stock collateral provided are recorded at the amount payable. Interest is paid on the loans payable.

(r) Derivatives and hedge accounting
In general, derivatives are used to minimise the impact of interest and currency rate changes to the group’s financial instruments 
and meet the IAS 39 criteria for hedge accounting. They are carried on the balance sheet at fair value which is obtained from 
quoted market prices in active markets, including recent market transactions, and discounted cash flow models.

On acquisition, a derivative is designated as a hedge and the group formally documents the relationship between the derivative 
and the hedged item. The group also documents its assessment, both at hedge inception and on an ongoing basis, of whether 
the derivative is highly effective in offsetting changes in fair values or cash flows of hedged items. If a hedge was deemed partially 
ineffective but continues to qualify for hedge accounting, the amount of the ineffectiveness, taking into account the timing of the 
expected cash flows where relevant, would be recorded in the income statement. If the hedge is not, or has ceased to be, highly 
effective the group discontinues hedge accounting.

For fair value hedges, changes in the fair value are recognised in the income statement, together with changes in the fair value of 
the hedged item.

For cash flow hedges, the fair value gain or loss associated with the effective proportion of the cash flow hedge is recognised 
initially directly in equity and recycled to the income statement in the period when the hedged item affects income.

(s) Other financial liabilities
Financial liabilities, other than derivative financial instruments and those held for trading, are recognised initially at fair value plus 
transaction costs directly attributable to the acquisition or issue of those financial liabilities. After initial recognition they are 
measured at amortised cost using the EIR method.

U09509_pp56_pp75.indd   60

29/9/10   20:51:15

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

61

(t) Foreign currencies
For the company and those subsidiaries whose balance sheets are denominated in sterling which is the company’s functional 
and presentation currency, monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are translated into sterling at the 
closing rates of exchange at the balance sheet date. Foreign currency transactions are translated into sterling at the average rates 
of exchange over the year and exchange differences arising are taken to the income statement.

The balance sheets of subsidiaries denominated in foreign currencies are translated into sterling at the closing rates. The income 
statements for these subsidiaries are translated at the average rates and exchange differences arising are taken to the exchange 
movements reserve. Such exchange differences are recognised as income or as expenses in the period in which the subsidiary 
is disposed of.

As allowed by IFRS 1, cumulative foreign exchange differences up to 31 July 2004 have not been recognised in the exchange 
movements reserve.

(u) Dividends
Dividends payable are recognised in retained earnings once they are appropriately authorised and no longer at the discretion of 
the company. Dividends receivable are recognised once the right to receive payment is established.

(v) Pensions
The group operates defined contribution pension schemes and a defined benefits pension scheme for eligible employees.

A defined contribution scheme is a pension arrangement where the group pays fixed contributions into a fund separate from the 
group’s assets. Contributions are charged in the income statement when they become payable.

A defined benefit scheme is an arrangement where an employee’s retirement receipts are defined by factors such as salary, 
length of service and age. The liabilities of the group’s one defined benefit scheme, which was closed to new entrants in 1996, 
are measured using the projected unit credit method and discounted at a rate that reflects the current rate of return on high 
quality corporate bonds with a term that matches that of the liabilities. Actuarial gains and losses arising from experience 
adjustments and changes in actuarial assumptions are charged or credited to the income statement over the members’ expected 
average remaining working lives. The net deficit or surplus on the plan, comprising the present value of the defined benefit 
obligation less the fair value of plan assets and any unrecognised actuarial gains and losses, is carried on the balance sheet.

(w) Investments in subsidiaries
Investments in subsidiaries are stated at cost less provision for impairment in value.

2. Critical accounting estimates and judgements
The preparation of financial statements under IFRS requires the use of certain critical accounting estimates and the exercise of 
judgement in the process of applying the group’s accounting policies. Estimates and judgements are kept under continuous 
evaluation and are based mainly on historical experience and expectations of future events but incorporate other factors. The 
critical estimates and judgements made in the preparation of the financial statements are set out below. The actual outcome may 
be materially different from that anticipated.

Impairment of loans and advances
Allowances for loan impairment represent management’s estimate of the losses incurred in the loan portfolios as at the balance 
sheet date. Changes to the allowances for loan impairment are reported in the consolidated income statement as impairment 
losses on loans and advances. Impairment provisions are made if there is objective evidence of impairment as a result of one or 
more subsequent events regarding a significant loan or a portfolio of loans (“a loan”) and its impact can be reliably estimated.

The amount of the loss is measured as the difference between the loan’s carrying amount and the present value of estimated 
future cash flows, excluding future credit losses that have not been incurred, discounted at the original effective interest rate. All 
impairment losses are reviewed at least at each reporting date. If subsequently the amount of the loss decreases as a result of a 
new event, the relevant element of the outstanding impairment loss is reversed. Interest on impaired financial assets is recognised 
at the original effective interest rate applied to the carrying amount as reduced by an allowance for impairment. For loans that are 
not considered individually significant, the group adopts a formulaic approach which allocates a loss rate dependent on the 
overdue period. Loss rates are based on the discounted expected future cash flows and are regularly benchmarked against 
actual outcomes to ensure they remain appropriate.

Fair value of financial instruments
Some of the group’s financial instruments are carried at fair value through profit or loss such as those held for trading, designated 
by management under the fair value option and non-cash flow hedging derivatives. Other non-derivative financial assets may be 
designated as available for sale. Available for sale financial assets are carried at fair value with gains and losses arising from 
changes in fair value included as a separate component of equity. In addition, the group has cash flow hedging derivatives which 
are carried at fair value. The fair value gain or loss associated with the effective proportion of the cash flow hedge is recognised 
initially directly in equity.

U09509_pp56_pp75.indd   61

29/9/10   20:51:15

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Financial Statements

The Notes

62

2. Critical accounting estimates and judgements continued
The fair value of a financial instrument is the amount at which the instrument could be exchanged in a current transaction 
between willing parties, other than in a forced or liquidation sale. Fair values of all financial instruments are obtained from 
independent open market sources, independent professional valuers, discounted cash flow models based on prevailing market 
rates or option pricing models. Where a valuation model is used to determine fair value, it makes maximum use of market inputs.

Effective interest rate
The EIR method applies a rate that discounts estimated future cash payments or receipts relating to a financial instrument to its 
net carrying amount. The estimated future cash flows take into account all contractual terms of the financial instrument including 
transaction costs and all other premiums or discounts but not future credit losses. At least annually, models are reviewed to 
assess expected lives of groups of assets based upon actual repayment profiles.

Goodwill impairment
The directors review goodwill for impairment at least annually or when events or changes in economic circumstances indicate 
that impairment may have taken place. The recoverable amounts of relevant cash generating units (“CGUs”) are based on value in 
use calculations using management’s best estimate of future cash flows and performance, discounted at an appropriate rate 
which the directors estimate to be the return appropriate to the business.

Hedge accounting
In designating a financial instrument as part of a qualifying hedge relationship, the directors have determined that the hedge is 
expected to be highly effective over the life of the hedging instrument. In accounting for a derivative as a cash flow hedge, the 
directors have determined that the future cash flows of the hedged exposure are highly probable. The group is required to assess 
on an ongoing basis whether the derivative is highly effective in offsetting changes in fair values or cash flows of hedged items. If a 
hedge was deemed partially ineffective but continues to qualify for hedge accounting, the amount of the ineffectiveness, taking 
into account the timing of the expected cash flows where relevant, would be recorded in the income statement. If the hedge is 
not, or has ceased to be, highly effective the group discontinues hedge accounting.

Share-based awards
The cost of the group’s long-term equity based incentive schemes are determined using commonly accepted valuation 
techniques. Fair values for market-based performance conditions use models which take into account the exercise price of the 
option, the current share price, the risk free interest rate, the expected volatility of the company’s share price over the life of the 
option/award and other relevant factors. For non market-based performance conditions, vesting conditions are not taken into 
account when measuring fair value, but are reflected by adjusting the number of shares in each award such that the amount 
recognised reflects the number that are expected to, and then actually do, vest. Details of the above variables can be found in 
note 31.

3. Segmental analysis
During the year, as disclosed in note 1(a), the group has adopted IFRS 8 which replaced IAS 14 Segment reporting. The Executive 
Committee, which is considered the group’s chief operating decision maker, manage the group by class of business as 
determined by the products and services offered and present the segmental analysis on that basis. The group’s activities are 
organised in three primary operating divisions namely Banking, Securities and Asset Management. A description of the activities, 
including products and services offered by these divisions is given in the Business Review. The group previously had another 
primary operating division, Corporate Finance. This division was disposed of in July 2009 and has been classified as a 
discontinued operation in these financial statements. The group also has central functions which comprise Group Executive, 
Finance, Investor Relations, Legal, Human Resources, Audit, Compliance, Corporate Development, Information Technology, 
Company Secretariat and Risk. Group administrative expenses include staff costs, legal and professional fees and property costs 
attributable to the central functions which support and assist the growth of the divisions. Income within group is typically immaterial 
and will include interest on cash balances at group. In the segmental reporting information which follows, group consists of the 
central functions described above as well as various non-trading head office companies and consolidation adjustments, in order 
that the information presented reconciles to the overall group consolidated income statement and balance sheet.

Divisions charge market prices for services rendered to other parts of the group. Funding charges between segments are 
determined by the Banking division’s Treasury operation having regard to commercial demands. The majority, being more than 
90%, of all of the group’s activities, revenue and assets are located within the British Isles.

U09509_pp56_pp75.indd   62

29/9/10   20:51:15

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Banking 
£ million 

Asset 
Securities  Management 
£ million 

£ million 

Group 
£ million 

Continuing  Discontinued
operations 
operations 
£ million 
£ million 

Total
£ million

63

Summary Income Statement for the year
  ended 31 July 2010
Net interest income/(expense)   
Other income 

188.5 
83.5 

(0.4) 
162.6 

7.1 
89.9 

0.3 
0.2 

195.5 
336.2 

Operating income before exceptional items 

272.0 

162.2 

97.0 

0.5 

531.7 

Administrative expenses 
Depreciation and amortisation  
Impairment losses on loans and advances 

(118.3) 
(10.8) 
(63.4) 

(100.9) 
(2.0) 
– 

(91.9) 
(1.8) 
– 

(20.6) 
(0.7) 
– 

(331.7) 
(15.3) 
(63.4) 

Total operating expenses before exceptionals 

(192.5) 

(102.9) 

(93.7) 

(21.3) 

(410.4) 

Adjusted operating profit/(loss)1 
Exceptional items: Impairment on investment assets  
Impairment losses on goodwill  
Amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition 
Gain on disposal of discontinued operations 

Operating profit/(loss) before tax 
Tax 
Minority interests 

79.5 
– 
– 
(0.5) 
– 

79.0 
(22.5) 
(0.3) –

59.3 
– 
– 
– 
– 

59.3 
(16.0) 

3.3 
– 
(6.5) 
– 
– 

(3.2) 
(0.5) 
(0.3) 

(20.8) 
(15.0) 
– 
– 
– 

(35.8) 
6.2 
– 

121.3 
(15.0) 
(6.5) 
(0.5) 
– 

99.3 
(32.8) 
(0.6) 

Profit/(loss) after tax and minority interests 

56.2 

43.3 

(4.0) 

(29.6) 

65.9 

External operating income/(expense) 
Inter segment operating income/(expense) 

284.5 
(12.5) –

162.2 

90.8 
6.2 

(5.8) 
6.3 

531.7 
– 

Segment operating income 

272.0 

162.2 

97.0 

0.5 

531.7 

– 
– 

– 

– 
– 
– 

– 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

– 
– 
– 

– 

– 
– 

– 

195.5
336.2

531.7

(331.7)
(15.3)
(63.4)

(410.4)

121.3
(15.0)
(6.5)
(0.5)
–

99.3
(32.8)
(0.6)

65.9

531.7
–

531.7

1 Adjusted operating profit/(loss) is stated before exceptional items, goodwill impairment, amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition, gain on disposal of discontinued operations 
and tax.

For the year ended 31 July 2010, the operating income before exceptional items and the operating profit before tax of the 
Securities division included £5.7 million (2009: £16.1 million) relating to its share of profit of associates.

The following table provides further detail on group wide operating income:

Banking
Net interest and fees on loan book:
Retail 
Commercial 
Property 
Treasury and other non-lending income 
Securities
Market-making and related activities 
Asset Management
Management fees on FuM 
Income on Assets under Administration and deposits 
Other income1 
Group 
Discontinued operations 

Operating income before exceptional items 

1 Includes performance fees, income on investment assets and other income.

2010 
£ million 

2009
£ million

104.9 
114.2 
36.5 
16.4 

85.9
99.5
30.8
19.3

162.2 

167.8

52.2 
32.7 
12.1 
0.5 
– 

54.3
37.6
3.1
3.8
36.3

531.7 

538.4

U09509_pp56_pp75.indd   63

29/9/10   20:51:16

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Financial Statements

The Notes

64

3. Segmental analysis continued

Summary Balance Sheet at 31 July 2010
Assets
Cash and loans and advances to banks   
Settlement balances, long trading positions and loans to
  money brokers1 
Loans and advances to customers 
Non trading debt securities 
Interests in associates 
Intangible assets 
Other assets 
Intercompany balances 

Total assets 

Liabilities
Settlement balances, short trading positions and loans from 
  money brokers 
Deposits by banks 
Deposits by customers 
Borrowings 
Other liabilities 
Intercompany balances 

Total liabilities 

Equity 

Banking 
£ million 

Asset
Securities  Management 
£ million 

£ million 

Group 
£ million 

Total
£ million

493.5 

26.8 

90.4 

0.5 

611.2

– 
  2,898.0 –
  1,448.1 
– 
29.6 
168.3 1
(475.7) 

713.3 –

2.0 
73.4 
28.7 4
5.5 
(27.5) 

14.6 
132.0 
0.3 
9.0 
52.9 
515.9 

– 
713.3
–  2,912.6
–  1,582.1
– 
73.7
107.5
0.2 
259.2
22.5 
–
(12.7) 

  4,561.8 

832.2 

855.1 

10.5  6,259.6

– 
37.8 –
  2,469.1 
  1,167.8 
148.5 
377.7 

597.8 –

1.2 
4.9 
59.9 
73.6 

10.3 
645.2 
1.5 
47.7 
17.5 

597.8
– 
48.1
– 
–  3,115.5
297.8  1,472.0
271.8
–

15.7 
(468.8) 

  4,200.9 

737.4 

722.2 

(155.3)  5,505.2

360.9 9

4.8 

132.9 

165.8 

754.4

Total liabilities and equities  

  4,561.8 

832.2 

855.1 

10.5  6,259.6

Other segmental information for the year ended 31 July 2010
Property, plant, equipment and intangible asset expenditure 
Employees (average number)   

19.9 
1,403 

1.6 
260 

1.9 
810 

2.4 
72 

25.8
2,545

1 £54.1 million of long trading positions in debt securities have been included with other trading balances in “Settlement balances, long trading positions and loans to money brokers” for 
the purpose of this summary balance sheet. These balances are included within “Debt securities” in the consolidated balance sheet.

U09509_pp56_pp75.indd   64

29/9/10   20:51:16

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Summary Income Statement for the year
  ended 31 July 2009
Net interest income/(expense)   
Other income 

Banking 
£ million 

Asset 
Securities  Management 
£ million 

£ million 

Group 
£ million 

Continuing  Discontinued
operations 
operations 
£ million 
£ million 

Total
£ million

65

166.9 
68.6 

(0.3) 
168.1 

14.0 
81.0 

1.2 
2.6 

181.8 
320.3 

(1.6) 
37.9 

180.2
358.2

Operating income before exceptional items 

235.5 

167.8 

95.0 

3.8 

502.1 

36.3 

538.4

Administrative expenses 
Depreciation and amortisation  
Impairment losses on loans and advances 

(112.3) 
(9.3) 
(59.9) 

(100.5) 
(2.4) 
– 

(80.8) 
(2.2) 
– 

(20.2) 
(0.8) 
– 

(313.8) 
(14.7) 
(59.9) 

(37.7) 
(1.0) 
– 

(351.5)
(15.7)
(59.9)

Total operating expenses before exceptionals 

(181.5) 

(102.9) 

(83.0) 

(21.0) 

(388.4) 

(38.7) 

(427.1)

Adjusted operating profit/(loss)1 
Exceptional items: Restructuring costs 
Impairment losses on goodwill  
Amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition 
Gain on disposal of discontinued operations 

 –

Operating profit/(loss) before tax 
Tax 
Minority interests 

54.0 

– –
(0.4) 
– 

53.6 
(16.3) 
(0.2) –

64.9 
(0.9) 

– 
– 

64.0 
(13.8) 

12.0 
(4.4) 
(19.0) 
– 
– 

(11.4) 
(1.4) 
(0.1) 

(17.2) 
(0.7) 
– 
– 
– 

(17.9) 
5.4 
– 

113.7 
(6.0) 
(19.0) 
(0.4) 
– 

88.3 
(26.1) 
(0.3) 

(2.4) 
– 
– 
– 
12.4 

10.0 
0.4 
(0.6) 

111.3
(6.0)
(19.0)
(0.4)
12.4

98.3
(25.7)
(0.9)

Profit/(loss) after tax and minority interests 

37.1 

50.2 

(12.9) 

(12.5) 

61.9 

9.8 

71.7

External operating income/(expense) 
Inter segment operating income/(expense) 

248.3 
(12.8) 

168.0 
(0.2) 

85.2 
9.8 

(1.2) 
5.0 

500.3 
1.8 

38.1 
(1.8) 

538.4
–

Segment operating income 

235.5 

167.8 

95.0 

3.8 

502.1 

36.3 

538.4

1 Adjusted operating profit/(loss) is stated before exceptional items, goodwill impairment, amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition, gain on disposal of discontinued operations 
and tax.

For the year ended 31 July 2009, the operating income before exceptional items and the operating profit before tax of the 
Securities division included £16.1 million relating to its share of profit of associates.

U09509_pp56_pp75.indd   65

29/9/10   20:51:16

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Financial Statements

The Notes

66

3. Segmental analysis continued

Summary Balance Sheet at 31 July 2009
Assets
Cash and loans and advances to banks   
Settlement balances, long trading positions and loans to
  money brokers1 
Loans and advances to customers 
Non trading debt securities 
Interests in associates2 
Intangible assets 
Other assets 
Intercompany balances 

Total assets 

Liabilities
Settlement balances, short trading positions and loans from 
  money brokers 
Deposits by banks 
Deposits by customers 
Borrowings 
Other liabilities 
Intercompany balances 

Total liabilities 

Equity 

Banking 
£ million 

Asset
Securities  Management 
£ million 

£ million 

Group 
£ million 

Total
£ million

27.9 

24.3 

145.3 

0.7 

198.2

– 
  2,352.6 –
  1,999.5 
 –

24.4 
189.1 
(332.6) 

728.9 –

4.4 
71.6 
29.3 
17.2 
(27.6) 

12.3 
257.4 
0.3 
53.9 
56.2 
379.7 

728.9
– 
–  2,364.9
–  2,261.3
– 
71.9
107.6
– 
286.5
24.0 
–
(19.5) 

  4,260.9 

848.1 

905.1 

5.2  6,019.3

 –

33.0 –
  2,241.9 
  1,417.6 
186.1 
91.6 

590.7 –

1.1 
18.2 
69.7 
71.9 

15.0 
676.6 
1.1 
50.0 
21.5 

590.7
– 
– 
48.0
–  2,919.6
–  1,436.9
326.4
–

20.6 
(185.0) 

  3,970.2 

751.6 

764.2 

(164.4)  5,321.6

290.7 

96.5 

140.9 

169.6 

697.7

Total liabilities and equity 

  4,260.9 

848.1 

905.1 

5.2  6,019.3

Other segmental information for the year ended 31 July 2009
Property, plant, equipment and intangible asset expenditure 
Employees (average number)   

17.2 
1,316 

2.2 
259 

1.8 
805 

1.1 
68 

22.3
2,448

1 £37.9 million of long trading positions in debt securities have been included with other trading balances in “Settlement balances, long trading positions and loans to money brokers” for 
the purpose of this summary balance sheet. These balances are included within “Debt securities” in the consolidated balance sheet.
2 Previously the interest in the group associate Mako had been presented in “Group” for the purposes of the segmental balance sheet. This has been reclassified to “Securities” in line with 
changes in internal management reporting.

U09509_pp56_pp75.indd   66

29/9/10   20:51:16

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

4. Operating profit before tax

Interest income
Interest and similar income arising from debt and other fixed income securities 
Other 

67

2010 
£ million 

2009
£ million

30.0 
279.8 

80.1
272.7

309.8 

352.8

Fee income and expense (other than amounts calculated using the EIR method) on financial instruments that are not at fair 
value through profit or loss were £72.9 million (2009: £52.5 million) and £5.8 million (2009: £4.0 million). Fee income and 
expense arising from trust and other fiduciary activities amounted to £88.4 million (2009: £90.7 million) and £12.8 million 
(2009: £13.5 million).

Administrative expenses
Staff costs:
Wages and salaries 
Social security costs 
Share-based awards 
Pension costs 

Depreciation and amortisation  
Other administrative expenses  

2010 
£ million 

2009
£ million

183.2 
20.3 
3.4 
6.7 

213.6 
15.3 
118.1 

178.2
21.2
(0.4)
8.9

207.9
14.7
111.9

347.0 

334.5

Operating lease rentals payable, of which £0.9 million (2009: £1.8 million) relate to plant and machinery, amounted to £7.9 million 
(2009: £9.1 million). 

5. Exceptional items

Impairment on investment assets 
Restructuring costs 

2010 
£ million 

2009
£ million

(15.0) –
– 

(15.0) 

(6.0)

(6.0)

The exceptional item above relates to impairment of available for sale equity shares and is separately disclosed on the face of the 
Consolidated Income Statement (2009: included within administrative expenses).

6. Information regarding the auditors

Fees payable
Audit of the company’s annual accounts   
Audit of the company’s subsidiaries pursuant to legislation 
Other services pursuant to legislation 
Tax services 
Other services 

The auditors of the group are Deloitte LLP.

2010 
£ million 

2009
£ million

0.1 
1.1 
– 
0.3 
0.3 

1.8 

0.1
1.3
0.1
0.4
0.1

2.0

U09509_pp56_pp75.indd   67

29/9/10   20:51:16

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial Statements

The Notes

68

7. Tax expense

Tax recognised in the income statement
Current tax:
UK corporation tax 
Foreign tax 
Adjustments in respect of previous years   

Deferred tax:
Deferred tax expense/(credit) for the current year 
Adjustments in respect of previous years   

Tax charge 

Tax recognised in equity
Current tax relating to:
Financial instruments classified as available for sale   
Share-based transactions 
Deferred tax relating to:
Cash flow hedging 
Financial instruments classified as available for sale   
Share-based transactions 

Reconciliation to tax expense
UK corporation tax for the year at 28% (2009: 28%) on operating profit 
Goodwill impairment losses disallowed 
Impairment on investment assets disallowed 
Effect of different tax rates in other jurisdictions 
Share of associates consolidated at profit after tax 
Utilisation of losses not previously recognised 
Disallowable items and other permanent differences  
Deferred tax impact of reduced UK corporation tax rate 
Prior year tax provision 

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

2010 
£ million 

2009
£ million

29.9 
1.8 
3.4 

26.2
0.8
(0.1)

35.1 

26.9

0.8 
(3.1) 

(0.8)
–

32.8 

26.1

7.4 
(0.5) –

2.3 
– 
(0.2) 

9.0 

27.8 
1.9 
4.2 –
(1.0) 
(1.6) 
(0.8) 
1.0 
1.0 –
0.3 

(5.1)

(4.4)
0.6
0.5

(8.4)

24.7
5.3

(1.6)
(4.5)
(0.4)
2.7

(0.1)

32.8 

26.1

The effective tax rate for the year is 33.0% (2009: 29.6%). The effective tax rate for the period is above the UK corporation tax rate 
of 28% due to non tax deductible impairment on investment assets and goodwill, other disallowable expenditure, and a reduction 
in the deferred tax asset due to a reduction in the UK corporation tax rate. These effects are offset by the inclusion of the share of 
profit of associates in the Consolidated Income Statement on an after tax basis in accordance with IAS 1 and by the net lower tax 
rates applied to profit arising outside the UK.

U09509_pp56_pp75.indd   68

29/9/10   20:51:16

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

8. Discontinued operations
In the prior year the sale of the Corporate Finance division for total net cash consideration of £67 million (including the settlement 
of an intra-group loan) was completed. Gross consideration was £75 million after contribution of £8 million of working capital to 
the division prior to completion. The transaction was completed on 1 July 2009 on which date control passed to the acquirer. The 
gain on disposal was calculated based on the cash consideration received after settlement of an intra-group loan, less the 
group’s share of net assets of the Corporate Finance division at date of disposal and directly attributable costs of sale. In addition, 
in accordance with IFRS 5, the cumulative exchange differences related to the division were recycled to the income statement as 
part of the gain on disposal.

The results of the discontinued operations which have been included in the Consolidated Income Statement in the year to 31 July 
2009 were as follows:

69

Operating income 
Operating expenses 
Operating loss before tax 
Tax 
Loss after tax 
Gain on disposal of discontinued operations 
Tax 
Gain after tax on disposal of discontinued operations 

Profit for the period from discontinued operations 

The net assets of the Corporate Finance division at the date of disposal were as follows:

Property, plant and equipment  
Loans and advances to banks  
Other receivables 
Other assets 
Intra-group loan 
Other liabilities 
Attributable goodwill 

2009
£ million
36.3
(38.7)
(2.4)
0.4
(2.0)
12.4
–
12.4

10.4

2009
£ million
2.9
24.2
9.7
4.8
(42.5)
(13.4)
33.6

19.3

In the year to 31 July 2009 the Corporate Finance division contributed £9.2 million to the group’s net operating cash flows and 
paid £16.1 million in respect of investing activities.

U09509_pp56_pp75.indd   69

29/9/10   20:51:17

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial Statements

The Notes

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

70

9. Earnings per share
Earnings per share is presented on six bases. On a continuing operations basis the following are presented: basic; diluted; 
adjusted basic; and adjusted diluted. These measures exclude the effect of the Corporate Finance division which was disposed 
of in July 2009 and has been classified as a discontinued operation. On a continuing and discontinued operations basis the 
following are presented: basic and diluted. 

Basic earnings per share is in respect of all activities and diluted earnings per share takes into account the dilution effects which 
would arise on the conversion or vesting of share options and share awards in issue during the period.

On a continuing operations basis, adjusted basic earnings per share excludes discontinued activities, exceptional items, 
impairment losses on goodwill, amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition and their tax effects to enable comparison of the 
underlying earnings of the business with prior periods and adjusted diluted earnings per share takes into account the same 
dilution effects as for diluted earnings per share described above.

Earnings per share 
Continuing operations
Basic 
Diluted 
Adjusted basic 
Adjusted diluted 

Continuing and discontinued operations
Basic 
Diluted 

Profit attributable to shareholders 
Gain for the period from discontinued operations 
Element attributable to minority interests   

Profit attributable to shareholders on continuing operations 
Adjustments:
Exceptional items 
Tax effect of exceptional items  
Impairment losses on goodwill  
Amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition 

Adjusted profit attributable to shareholders on continuing operations 

Average number of shares 
Basic weighted 
Effect of dilutive share options and awards 

Diluted weighted 

2010 

2009

46.0p 
45.2p 
61.3p 
60.3p 

43.6p
43.2p
60.5p
59.9p

46.0p 
45.2p 

50.5p
50.0p

£ million 
65.9 
– 
– 

£ million
71.7
(10.4)
0.6

65.9 

61.9

15.0 
– 
6.5 
0.5 

6.0
(1.5)
19.0
0.4

87.9 

85.8

million 

million

143.4 
2.4 

141.9
1.4

145.8 

143.3

The gain for the year from discontinued operations, net of any minority interest effect, is £nil (2009: £9.8 million). The basic 
earnings per share from discontinued operations is nil (2009: 6.9p) and the diluted earnings per share from discontinued 
operations is nil (2009: 6.8p).

Adjusted basic earnings per share on a continuing and discontinued basis was 61.3p (2009: 67.4p), based on adjusted profit 
attributable to shareholders on continuing and discontinued operations of £87.9 million (2009: £95.7 million).

U09509_pp56_pp75.indd   70

29/9/10   20:51:17

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

10. Dividends

For each ordinary share
Final dividend for previous financial year paid in November 2009: 25.5p (2008: 25.5p)  
Interim dividend for current financial year paid in April 2010: 13.5p (2009: 13.5p) 

71

2010 
£ million 

2009
£ million

36.3 
19.2 

55.5 

36.2
19.0

55.2

A final dividend relating to the year ended 31 July 2010 of 25.5p, amounting to an estimated £36.4 million, is proposed. This final 
dividend, which is due to be paid on 19 November 2010, is not reflected in these financial statements.

11. Loans and advances to banks

Repayable
On demand 
Within three months 
Between three months and one year 

12. Loans and advances to customers

Repayable
On demand 
Within three months 
Between three months and one year 
Between one and two years 
Between two and five years 
After more than five years 
Impairment provisions 

Impairment provisions on loans and advances
At 1 August 
Charge for the year 
Amounts written off net of recoveries 

Impairment provisions at 31 July 

Loans and advances comprise
Hire purchase agreement receivables 
Finance lease receivables 
Other loans and advances 

2010 
£ million 

2009
£ million

136.2 
19.9 
2.4 

183.2
11.2
2.1

158.5 

196.5

2010 
£ million 

2009
£ million

49.6 
  1,069.3 
822.9 
490.6 
554.5 
12.8 
(87.1) 

37.9
707.7
827.6
425.1
426.3
11.5
(71.2)

  2,912.6  2,364.9

71.2 
63.4 
(47.5) 

50.3
59.9
(39.0)

87.1 

71.2

  1,033.5 
232.9 

834.1
242.9
  1,646.2  1,287.9

  2,912.6  2,364.9

U09509_pp56_pp75.indd   71

29/9/10   20:51:17

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial Statements

The Notes

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

72

12. Loans and advances to customers continued
Reconciliation between gross investment in finance lease and hire purchase agreement receivables to present 
value of minimum lease and hire purchase payments:

Gross investment in finance leases and hire purchase agreement receivables due:
Within one year 
Between one and five years 
After more than five years 

Unearned finance income 

Present value of minimum lease and hire purchase agreement payments   

Of which due:
Within one year 
Between one and five years 
After more than five years 

2010 
£ million 

2009
£ million

571.7 
943.4 
3.8 

517.1
765.7
12.3

  1,518.9  1,295.1
(197.0)

(234.0) 

  1,284.9  1,098.1

466.9 
814.5 
3.5 

430.7
658.9
8.5

The aggregate cost of assets acquired for the purpose of letting under finance leases and hire purchase agreements was 
£2,169.1 million (2009: £1,698.4 million). The average effective interest rate on finance leases approximates to 11.7% (2009: 11.7%). 
The fair value of finance lease receivables and hire purchase agreements equates to the net book value. The present value of 
minimum lease and hire purchase agreement payments reflects the fair value of finance lease and hire purchase agreement 
receivables before deduction of impairment provisions.

13. Debt securities

2010 
Long trading positions in debt securities   
Certificates of deposit 
Floating rate notes 
Gilts and government guaranteed debt 

2009 
Long trading positions in debt securities   
Certificates of deposit 
Floating rate notes 
Gilts and government guaranteed debt 

Held 
for trading 
£ million 
54.1 
– 
– 
– 

Held to
maturity  Available for 
sale assets 
£ million 
– 
– 
615.4 
285.6 

assets 
£ million 
– 
– 
9.0 
– 

Loans and
receivables 
£ million 
– 
672.1 
– 
– 

Total
£ million
54.1
672.1
624.4
285.6

54.1 

9.0 

901.0 

672.1  1,636.2

Held 
for trading 
£ million 
37.9 
– 
– 
– 

Held to
maturity  Available for 
Loans and
sale assets 
receivables 
Total
£ million 
£ million 
£ million
– 
37.9
– 
–  1,202.2  1,202.2
774.1
– 
285.0
– 

assets 
£ million 
– 
– 
19.4 
– 

754.7 
285.0 

The fair value of items carried at amortised cost together with their book value is as follows:

37.9 

19.4  1,039.7  1,202.2  2,299.2

Certificates of deposit classified as loans and receivables 
Floating rate notes held to maturity 

2010 

2009

  Book value 
£ million 
672.1 
9.0 

Fair value 
Book value 
Fair value
£ million 
£ million 
£ million
672.4  1,202.2  1,207.9
18.8
19.4 

8.8 

681.1 

681.2  1,221.6  1,226.7

U09509_pp56_pp75.indd   72

29/9/10   20:51:17

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Movements on the book value of gilts and government guaranteed debt and floating rate notes held during the year comprise:

73

At 1 August 2008 
Additions 
Disposals 
Redemptions at maturity 
Currency translation differences 
Impairment 
Decrease in carrying value of financial instruments classified as available for sale 

At 31 July 2009 

Disposals 
Redemptions at maturity 
Currency translation differences 
Increase in carrying value of financial instruments classified as available for sale 

At 31 July 2010 

Gilts and
government
guaranteed
debt 

Available 
for sale 
£ million 
– 
286.0 
– 
– 
– 
– 
(1.0) 

Floating rate notes

Available 
for sale 
£ million 
751.3 
– 
(20.0) 
– (
44.4 
– 
(21.0) 

Held to
maturity 
£ million 
23.4 
– 
– 
2.0) 
0.8 
(2.8) 
– 

Total
£ million
774.7
286.0
(20.0)
(2.0)
45.2
(2.8)
(22.0)

285.0 

754.7 

19.4  1,059.1

– 
– 
– 
0.6 

(32.5) 
(137.1) (
4.1 
26.2 

– 
10.3) 
(0.1) 
– 

(32.5)
(147.4)
4.0
26.8

285.6 

615.4 

9.0 

910.0

In respect of floating rate notes, both classified as available for sale and held to maturity, £132.4 million (2009: £141.5 million) were 
due to mature within one year and £25.0 million (2009: £25.9 million) have been issued by corporates with the remainder issued 
by banks and building societies.

U09509_pp56_pp75.indd   73

29/9/10   20:51:17

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial Statements

The Notes

74

14. Equity shares

Equity shares classified as held for trading 
Other equity shares 

Movements on the book value of other equity shares held during the year comprise:

At 1 August 2008 
Additions 
Disposals 
Currency translation differences 
Disposals of subsidiary undertakings 
Increase/(decrease) in carrying value of:
Equity shares classified as available for sale 
Unlisted equity shares held at fair value 

At 31 July 2009 

Additions 
Disposals 
Currency translation differences 
Increase/(decrease) in carrying value of:
Equity shares classified as available for sale 
Unlisted equity shares held at fair value 

At 31 July 2010 

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

2010 
£ million 
31.5 
28.4 

2009
£ million
24.0
38.0

59.9 

62.0

Available 

Fair value
through
for sale  profit or loss 
£ million 
£ million 
16.2 
33.0 
3.3 
0.1 
(1.0) 
– 
– (
(0.7) 
(0.4) (
(0.6) 

Total
£ million
49.2
3.4
(1.0)
0.7)
1.0)

(6.4) 
– 

– 
(5.5) 

(6.4)
(5.5)

25.4 

12.6 

38.0

– 
– 
(0.3) 

(2.4) 
– 

22.7 

0.2 
(10.9) 
– (

– 
3.8 

5.7 

0.2
(10.9)
0.3)

(2.4)
3.8

28.4

U09509_pp56_pp75.indd   74

29/9/10   20:51:17

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

15. Derivative financial instruments

Exchange rate contracts 
Interest rate contracts 

75

Notional 
value 
£ million 
423.6 
  2,282.0 

2010 

Assets 
£ million 
14.5 
8.5 

Liabilities 
£ million 
8.8 

Notional
value 
£ million 
707.7 
11.7  2,029.7 

2009

Assets 
£ million 
21.5 
11.0 

Liabilities
£ million
8.0
13.9

  2,705.6 

23.0 

20.5  2,737.4 

32.5 

21.9

Notional amounts of interest rate contracts totalling £1,000.8 million (2009: £1,312.0 million) and exchange rate contracts totalling 
£20.8 million (2009: £372.3 million) have a residual maturity of more than one year. The group enters into derivative contracts with 
a number of financial institutions as a principal only to minimise the impact of interest and currency rate changes to its financial 
instruments. Notional value of exchange rate contracts has decreased £284.1 million due to a reduction in the requirement to 
hedge euro and US dollar denominated funding in the year. Included in the derivatives above are the following IAS 39 cash flow 
hedges and IAS 39 fair value hedges:

Cash flow hedges 
Exchange rate contracts 
Interest rate contracts 

Fair value hedges 
Exchange rate contracts 
Interest rate contracts 

Notional 
value 
£ million 
124.8 
874.4 

2010 

Assets 
£ million 
4.6 
0.3 

Notional
value 
Liabilities 
£ million 
£ million 
3.2 
128.3 
5.7  1,027.7 

2009

Assets 
£ million 
6.6 
2.1 

Liabilities
£ million
2.1
13.9

999.2 

4.9 

8.9  1,156.0 

8.7 

16.0

Notional 
value 
£ million 
242.1 
918.1 

2010 

Assets 
£ million 
8.9 
7.3 

Notional
value 
Liabilities 
£ million 
£ million 
4.3 
464.1 
5.6  1,002.0 

2009

Assets 
£ million 
11.6 
8.9 

Liabilities
£ million
2.7
–

  1,160.2 

16.2 

9.9  1,466.1 

20.5 

2.7

The cash flow hedges relate to exposure to future interest payments or receipts on recognised financial instruments and on 
forecast transactions for periods of up to seven (2009: five) years; there was immaterial ineffectiveness. The cash flow hedge 
amounts that were removed from equity and included in the consolidated income statement for the years ended 31 July 2010 
and 2009 were immaterial. The amount recognised in equity for cash flow hedges was a credit of £6.1 million (2009: £11.1 million 
debit).

The group’s fair value hedges hedge the interest rate and foreign exchange risks in recognised financial instruments; the net gain 
on the hedged items was £11.5 million (2009: gain of £17.8 million) which was offset by the hedging instrument.

U09509_pp56_pp75.indd   75

29/9/10   20:51:17

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial Statements

The Notes

76

16. Intangible assets

Cost
At 1 August 2008 
Additions 
Acquisition of subsidiary 
Foreign exchange 
Disposals 

At 31 July 2009 
Additions 
Foreign exchange 

At 31 July 2010 

Amortisation and impairment
At 1 August 2008 
Amortisation charge for the year 
Impairment charge 
Disposals 

At 31 July 2009 
Amortisation charge for the year 
Impairment charge 

At 31 July 2010 

Net book value at 31 July 2010 

Net book value at 31 July 2009 

Net book value at 1 August 2008 

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Goodwill 
£ million 

Software 
£ million 

Intangible
assets on 
acquisition 
£ million 

Group 
Total 
£ million 

Company
Software
£ million

176.9 
– 
24.1 
3.0 
(34.9) 

169.1 
1.4 
0.7 

21.1 
1.8 
– 
– 
(1.1) 

21.8 
4.7 
– 

3.2 
– 
1.7 
– 
– 

4.9 
2.1 
– 

201.2 –
1.8 
25.8 –
3.0 –
(36.0) –

195.8 
8.2 
0.7 

171.2 

26.5 

7.0 

204.7 

50.1 
– 
19.0 
– 

69.1 
– 
6.5 

16.7 
2.7 
– 
(0.7) 

18.7 
2.0 
– 

75.6 

20.7 

95.6 

100.0 

126.8 

5.8 

3.1 

4.4 

– 
0.4 
– 
– 

0.4 
0.5 
– 

0.9 

6.1 

4.5 

66.8 –
3.1 –
19.0 –
(0.7) –

88.2 
2.5 
6.5 –

97.2 –

107.5 

107.6 

3.2 

134.4 –

–

–
0.2
–

0.2

–
–

0.2

–

Impairment tests for goodwill
Goodwill has been allocated to 14 individual CGUs, which are all at a lower level than the three operating divisions. Eight of these 
CGUs are within the Banking division; two are within the Securities division and the remaining four are within the Asset Management 
division. Details of the CGUs in which the goodwill carrying amount is significant in comparison with total goodwill are disclosed 
separately in the table below where applicable:

Winterflood Securities 
Close Private Bank 
Close Brothers Cayman 
Close Asset Management 
Close Asset Finance 
Other 

31 July 
2009 
£ million 
23.3 
17.4 
15.9 
7.2 
7.4 
28.8 

Net book value of goodwill

Additions 
£ million 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
1.4 

Foreign 
exchange 
£ million 
– 
– 
0.9 
– 
– 
(0.2) 

Impairment 
£ million 
– 
(6.2) 
(0.3) 
– 
– 
– 

31 July
2010
£ million
23.3
11.2
16.5
7.2
7.4
30.0

100.0 

1.4 

0.7 

(6.5) 

95.6

U09509_pp76_pp89.indd   76

29/9/10   20:51:31

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Goodwill impairment reviews are carried out at least annually using value in use calculations. This calculation typically uses 
discounted cash flow projections based on the most recent budgets and three year plans to determine the recoverable amount 
of each CGU. For cash flows beyond the group’s three year planning horizon, a terminal value was calculated using an annual 
growth rate of 3% for each CGU, except where circumstances warrant a different rate. The resulting cash flows were then 
discounted using a rate of 12.2%, which represents the group’s estimated weighted average cost of capital of 9%, grossed up by 
the group effective tax rate, which management feels is appropriate due to the use of pre-tax operating cash flows in the model. 
As a result of our value in use calculations an impairment charge of £6.5 million has been recognised in Asset Management in 
response to continuing difficult trading conditions.

The cash flows used in these value in use calculations are sensitive to the impact of changes in the assumptions for profit before 
tax, discount rates, and long-term growth rates. Management believes that any reasonably possible change in the key assumptions 
which have been used would not lead the carrying value of any CGU to exceed its recoverable amount.

17. Property, plant and equipment

77

Group 
Cost
At 1 August 2008 
Additions 
Acquisition of subsidiary 
Disposal of subsidiary 
Other disposals 

At 31 July 2009 
Additions 
Other disposals 

At 31 July 2010 

Depreciation
At 1 August 2008 
Charge for the year 
Disposal of subsidiary 
Disposals 

At 31 July 2009 
Charge for the year 
Disposals 

At 31 July 2010 

Net book value at 31 July 2010 

Net book value at 31 July 2009 

Net book value at 1 August 2008 

Land and 
buildings 
£ million 

Fixtures, 
fittings and 
equipment 
£ million 

Assets 
held under
operating 
leases 
£ million 

Motor
vehicles 
£ million 

Total
£ million

10.3 
1.2 
– 
(1.7) 
– 

9.8 
1.6 
(3.7) 

52.5 
7.3 
0.4 
(6.0) 
(3.6) (

50.6 
6.6 
(4.4) 

22.9 
12.4 
6.4 
– 
4.3) 

37.4 
12.6 
(6.4) 

2.5 
0.3 
0.1 
(0.2) 
(0.8) 

1.9 
0.3 
(0.4) 

88.2
21.2
6.9
(7.9)
(8.7)

99.7
21.1
(14.9)

7.7 

52.8 

43.6 

1.8 

105.9

5.3 
1.2 
(0.3) 
– (

6.2 
0.7 
(3.3) 

3.6 

4.1 

3.6 

5.0 

39.4 
5.4 
(4.3) 
2.6) 

37.9 
6.0 
(4.3) 

9.8 
5.9 
– 
(2.7) 

13.0 
6.2 
(3.8) 

39.6 

15.4 

13.2 

28.2 

12.7 

24.4 

13.1 

13.1 

1.1 
0.5 
(0.1) 
(0.5) 

1.0 
0.4 
(0.3) 

1.1 

0.7 

0.9 

1.4 

55.6
13.0
(4.7)
(5.8)

58.1
13.3
(11.7)

59.7

46.2

41.6

32.6

2010 
£ million 

2009
£ million

8.3 
9.1 
1.8 

19.2 

8.5
11.8
0.5

20.8

Future minimum lease payments under non-cancellable operating leases due
Within one year 
Between one and five years 
After more than five years 

U09509_pp76_pp89.indd   77

29/9/10   20:51:32

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial Statements

The Notes

78

17. Property, plant and equipment continued

Company 
Cost
At 1 August 2008 
Additions 
Disposals 

At 31 July 2009 
Additions 
Disposals 

At 31 July 2010 

Depreciation
At 1 August 2008 
Charge for the year 
Disposals 

At 31 July 2009 
Charge for the year 
Disposals 

At 31 July 2010 

Net book value at 31 July 2010 

Net book value at 31 July 2009 

Net book value at 1 August 2008 

The net book value of land and buildings comprises:

Long leasehold 
Short leasehold 

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Land and 
buildings 
£ million 

Fixtures, 
fittings and 
equipment 
£ million 

Motor 
vehicles 
£ million 

Total
property,
plant and
equipment
£ million

4.2 
0.5 
– (

4.7 
1.5 
(3.7) 

2.5 

3.0 
0.5 
– (

3.5 
0.3 
(3.3) 

0.5 

2.0 

1.2 

1.2 

2.3 
0.6 
0.2) 

2.7 
0.6 
(1.3) 

2.0 

1.7 
0.3 
0.2) 

1.8 
0.4 
(1.3) 

0.9 

1.1 

0.9 

0.6 

0.2 
– 
(0.1) (

0.1 
– 
– 

0.1 

0.1 
– 
(0.1) (

– 
– 
– 

– 

0.1 

0.1 

0.1 

6.7
1.1
0.3)

7.5
2.1
(5.0)

4.6

4.8
0.8
0.3)

5.3
0.7
(4.6)

1.4

3.2

2.2

1.9

Group 

Company

2010 
£ million 
1.5 
2.6 

2009 
£ million 
1.5 
2.1 

4.1 

3.6 

2010 
£ million 

2009
£ million

– –
2.0 

2.0 

1.2

1.2

U09509_pp76_pp89.indd   78

29/9/10   20:51:32

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

79

Group 

Company

2010 
£ million 
22.0 
9.0 
(1.0) 
2.8 

2009 
£ million 
14.6 
6.1 
– 
11.9 

2010 
£ million 
0.3 
3.0 
– –
– 

32.8 

32.6 

3.3 

2009
£ million
0.2
2.4

2.2

4.8

Group 
£ million 
29.0 
0.8 (
3.3 
(0.5) 

32.6 
2.3 
(2.1) 

32.8 

Company
£ million
5.4
0.6)
–
–

4.8
(2.0)
0.5

3.3

18. Deferred tax assets

Capital allowances 
Employee benefits 
Unrealised capital gains 
Other 

Movement in the year:

At 1 August 2008 
Credit/(expense) to the income statement  
Equity movements 
Other 

At 31 July 2009 
Credit/(expense) to the income statement  
Equity movements 

At 31 July 2010 

As the group has been, and is expected to continue to be, consistently profitable it is appropriate to recognise the full deferred tax 
asset.

U09509_pp76_pp89.indd   79

29/9/10   20:51:32

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial Statements

The Notes

80

19. Other assets and other liabilities

Prepayments, accrued income and other assets
Prepayments and accrued income 
Trade debtors 
Other 

Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities
Accruals and deferred income  
Creditors 
Provisions 
Other 

Provisions movement in the year:

Group
At 1 August 2008 
Utilisation 
Charge/(release) 

At 31 July 2009 
Utilisation 
Charge/(release) 

At 31 July 2010 

Company
At 1 August 2008 
Utilisation 
Charge/(release) 

At 31 July 2009 
Utilisation 
Charge/(release) 

At 31 July 2010 

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

2010 
£ million 

2009
£ million

88.6 
17.7 
22.5 

110.1
14.2
17.5

128.8 

141.8

122.0 
81.9 
14.0 
33.4 

141.3
81.9
26.1
55.2

251.3 

304.5

Claims 
£ million 

Property 
£ million 

Other 
£ million 

Total
£ million

10.1 
(0.1) 
(1.8) 

8.2 
(4.6) 
(0.8) 

2.8 

3.8 
(0.2) (
3.3 

6.9 
– 
(0.3) (

10.7 
2.7) 
3.0 

11.0 
(5.3) 
1.1) 

24.6
(3.0)
4.5

26.1
(9.9)
(2.2)

6.6 

4.6 

14.0

Property 
£ million 

Other 
£ million 

Total
£ million

0.7 
(0.2) (
3.2 

3.7 
– 
– 

3.7 

5.9 
0.4) 
(0.5) 

5.0 
(1.0) 
(0.3) 

3.7 

6.6
(0.6)
2.7

8.7
(1.0)
(0.3)

7.4

Property provisions are in respect of leaseholds where rents payable exceed the value to Close Brothers Group plc or in respect 
of potential dilapidations. Claims and other items for which provisions are made arise in the normal course of business. The timing 
and outcome of these claims and other items are uncertain.

In April 2010 Winterflood paid a financial penalty imposed by the Financial Services Authority (“FSA”). The penalty of £4.0 million 
was fully provided for in previous years.

U09509_pp76_pp89.indd   80

29/9/10   20:51:32

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

81

2010 
£ million 
498.1 

48.6 
18.4 

2009
£ million
505.2

71.4
14.1

565.1 

590.7

Between 
one and  
two years 
£ million 

Between 
After
two and   more than
five years 
£ million 

five years 
£ million 

Total
£ million

  On demand 
£ million 

  Within three 

Between 
three months 
months  and one year 
£ million 
£ million 

23.0 
782.0 
13.7 
– 

25.1 

– 
787.6  1,301.3 
617.2 
437.5 
– 
– 

– 
186.4 
50.0 
– 

– 
56.0 
60.0 
20.8 

– 

48.1
2.2  3,115.5
–  1,178.4
218.6

197.8 

20. Settlement balances and short positions

Settlement balances 
Short positions held for trading:
Debt securities 
Equity shares 

21. Financial liabilities

At 31 July 2010
Deposits by banks 
Deposits by customers 
Loans and overdrafts from banks 
Debt securities in issue 

818.7  1,250.2  1,918.5 

236.4 

136.8 

200.0  4,560.6

Included in loans and overdrafts from banks is £402.2 million of committed sale and repurchase facilities with a residual maturity 
of between three months and one year (2009: £405.1 million with a residual maturity of between one and two years). The group 
issued £200 million of 6.5% senior unsecured fixed rate notes in February 2010 due to mature on 10 February 2017 which have 
been classified as debt securities in issue. Of the debt securities in issue, £20.8 million mature on 20 April 2015 and £197.8 million 
on 10 February 2017.

  On demand 
£ million 

  Within three 

Between 
three months 
months  and one year 
£ million 
£ million 

Between 
one and  
two years 
£ million 

Between 
After
two and   more than
five years 
£ million 

five years 
£ million 

Total
£ million

At 31 July 2009
Deposits by banks 
Deposits by customers 
Loans and overdrafts from banks 
Debt securities in issue 

22. Subordinated loan capital

Final maturity 
date 
2020 
2026 
2026 

17.2 
768.7 
26.6 
– 

19.6 
916.6 
0.6 
– 

0.6 
10.6 
345.5 
814.9 
199.7  1,003.6 
– 

– 

– 
73.9 
110.0 
– 

– 
48.0
–  2,919.6
–  1,340.5
21.4

21.4 

812.5 

936.8 

555.8  1,819.1 

183.9 

21.4  4,329.5

  Prepayment 
date 
2015 
2021 
2021 

Initial
interest 
rate 
7.39% 
7.42% 
7.62% 

2010 
£ million 
30.0 
15.0 
30.0 

2009
£ million
30.0
15.0
30.0

75.0 

75.0

All the subordinated loan capital has been issued by Close Brothers Limited (“CBL”) and is denominated in sterling. If CBL opts 
not to prepay at the prepayment date, the interest rate is reset to a margin over the yield on five year UK Treasury securities.

U09509_pp76_pp89.indd   81

29/9/10   20:51:32

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial Statements

The Notes

82

23. Share capital

Group and company 
Authorised
Ordinary shares of 25p each 

Allotted, issued and fully paid
At 1 August 2009 
Exercise of options 

At 31 July 

24. Company reserves

At 1 August 2008 
Profit attributable to shareholders 
Dividends paid 
Shares purchased 
Shares released 
Other movements 

At 31 July 2009 
Profit attributable to shareholders 
Dividends paid 
Shares purchased 
Shares released 
Other movements 

At 31 July 2010 

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

2010 

2009

million 

£ million 

million 

£ million

200.0 

50.0 

200.0 

50.0

149.5 
0.2 

37.4 
– 

149.4 
0.1 

149.7 

37.4 

149.5 

Profit and 
loss account 
£ million 
525.5 (
49.9 –
(55.2) 
– 
– 
(2.3) 

517.9 
9.4 –
(55.5) 
– 
– 
5.4 

37.3
0.1

37.4

Other
reserves
£ million
19.4)

–
(22.1)
4.3
(0.2)

(37.4)

–
(2.3)
9.5
0.8

477.2 

(29.4)

Movements in the group reserves are now presented in the consolidated statement of changes in equity on page 53.

25. Capital management
The FSA supervises the group on a consolidated basis and receives information on the capital adequacy of, and sets capital 
requirements for, the group as a whole. In addition a number of subsidiaries are directly regulated by the FSA. The aim of the 
capital adequacy regime is to promote safety and soundness in the financial system. It is structured around three “pillars”: Pillar 1 
on minimum capital requirements; Pillar 2 on the supervisory review process; and Pillar 3 on market discipline. The group’s Pillar 1 
information is presented in the table on the next page. Under Pillar 2, the group has completed a self assessment of risks in a 
process known as the “Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process”. This has been reviewed by the FSA and the process 
culminated in the FSA providing “Individual Capital Guidance” on the level of capital the group and its regulated subsidiaries are 
required to hold. Pillar 3 aims to encourage market discipline by developing a set of disclosure requirements which will allow 
market participants to assess key pieces of information on a firm’s capital, risk exposures and risk assessment process. Pillar 3 
disclosures can be found on the group’s website www.closebrothers.co.uk/pillar3disclosures.aspx.

The group’s policy has always been to be well capitalised and soundly funded. The group’s approach to capital management is 
driven by strategic and organisational requirements, while also taking into account the regulatory and commercial environments in 
which it operates. In addition to maintaining a strong capital base to support the development of the business it is also important 
to ensure the group meets regulatory capital requirements at all times, and therefore maintains capital adequacy ratios 
comfortably above minimum regulatory requirements.

The group’s individual regulated entities and the group as a whole complied with all of the externally imposed capital requirements 
to which they are subject for the years ended 31 July 2010 and 2009. A full analysis of the composition of regulatory capital and 
Pillar 1 risk weighted assets is shown in the following table, including a reconciliation between equity and core tier 1 capital after 
deductions.

The group capital ratios remained strong with core tier 1 ratio of 13.9% (2009: 14.8%) and total capital ratio of 15.8% (2009: 16.6%). 
The fall in the capital ratios was principally due to a significant increase in risk weighted assets as a result of growth in the loan 
book, including the acquisition of GMAC Commercial Finance Limited (UK) invoice financing loan book.

U09509_pp76_pp89.indd   82

29/9/10   20:51:32

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Regulatory capital (core tier 1 and total) increased during the year due to an increase in retained earnings and other reserves, and 
the recognition of unrealised gains on available for sale equity shares in total capital (2009: deduction of unrealised losses on 
available for sale equity shares from tier 1 capital). The composition of capital remained consistent with 88.2% (2009: 89.3%) of 
the total capital consisting of core tier 1 capital.

83

Core tier 1 capital
Called up share capital 
Share premium account 
Retained earnings and other reserves 
Minority interests 
Deductions from core tier 1 capital
Intangible assets 
Goodwill in associates 
Investment in own shares 
Unrealised losses on available for sale equity shares  

Core tier 1 capital after deductions 

Tier 2 capital
Subordinated debt 
Unrealised gains on available for sale equity shares   

Tier 2 capital 

Deductions from total of tier 1 and tier 2 capital
Participation in a non-financial undertaking 
Other regulatory adjustments   

Total regulatory capital 

Risk weighted assets (notional)
Credit and counterparty risk 
Operational risk1 
Market risk1 

Core tier 1 capital ratio 
Total capital ratio 

1Operational and market risk include a notional adjustment at 8% in order to determine notional risk weighted assets.

Reconciliation between equity and core tier 1 capital after deductions

Equity 
Regulatory deductions from equity:
Intangible assets 
Goodwill in associates 
Other reserves not recognised for core tier 1 capital:
Cash flow hedging reserve 
Available for sale movements reserve1 

Core tier 1 capital after deductions 

1Total available for sale movements reserve less unrealised losses on available for sale equity shares.

2010 
£ million 

2009
£ million

37.4 
275.9 
490.6 
2.5 

37.4
274.5
477.8
4.3

(107.5) 
(51.9) 
(43.7) 
– 

(107.6)
(49.0)
(50.9)
(4.6)

603.3 

581.9

75.0 
7.6 –

75.0

82.6 

75.0

(1.8) 
(0.3) 

(4.8)
(0.5)

683.8 

651.6

  3,230.8  2,840.2
993.8
102.8

971.9 
136.0 

  4,338.7  3,936.8

% %

13.9 
15.8 

14.8
16.6

2010 
£ million 
754.4 

2009
£ million
697.7

(107.5) 
(51.9) 

(107.6)
(49.0)

3.6 
4.7 

9.7
31.1

603.3 

581.9

U09509_pp76_pp89.indd   83

29/9/10   20:51:32

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial Statements

The Notes

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

84

26. Investments in subsidiaries
The group’s principal subsidiaries as permitted by Section 410(2) of the Companies Act 2006, at 31 July 2010 were:

Name of subsidiary 
Close Asset Finance Limited 
Close Asset Management Holdings Limited 
Close Brothers Holdings Limited1 
Close Brothers Limited 

Winterflood Securities Limited 

1Direct subsidiary of the company.

Principal activity 
Commercial asset financing 
Asset management holding company 
Group holding company 
Treasury, property and insurance
  premium financing, and bank holding company 
Market-making 

 Equity held 
  by group 
% 
100 
100 
100 

Country of
registration
and operation
England
England
England

100 
100 

England
England

Full information on all related undertakings will be included in the Companies House Annual Return.

On 4 January 2010 the group acquired the invoice financing loan book of GMAC Commercial Finance Limited (UK) for a premium 
to net book value of up to £4.0 million in cash. The loan book acquired of £93.8 million is not regarded as material in the context 
of the group’s financial statements and therefore the information that would be required for material acquisitions by IFRS 3 has not 
been disclosed.

There was no movement in the company’s investments in subsidiaries during the year.

27. Investments in associates

Share of net assets/(liabilities) 
Share of profit before tax 
Share of tax 
Share of profit after tax1 
Dividends paid 
Foreign exchange revaluation   
Classification to subsidiary on increase in stake 

Carrying amount at 1 August    

Carrying amount at 31 July   

1Share of profit after tax in 2009 includes £0.5 million relating to discontinued operations.

Associates

2010 
£ million 
8.2 
(2.5) 
5.7 
(8.2) 
4.3 
– 

2009
£ million
22.8
(6.2)
16.6
(19.1)
12.2
(11.0)

1.8 

(1.3)

71.9 

73.7 

73.2

71.9

The group has eight (2009: eight) associates. The associates owe £nil (2009: £nil) to the group. The group’s share of the 
aggregated revenue of its associates in the year to 31 July 2010 amounted to £27.3 million (2009: £73.6 million). The group’s share 
of the aggregated assets and liabilities of its associates at 31 July 2010 amounted to £43.7 million (2009: £44.1 million) and 
£21.0 million (2009: £19.4 million) respectively.

U09509_pp76_pp89.indd   84

29/9/10   20:51:33

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

85

28. Contingent liabilities and commitments
Contingent liabilities
Financial Services Compensation Scheme
A principal subsidiary of the group, CBL, by virtue of being a FSA regulated deposit taker, contributes to the Financial Services 
Compensation Scheme (“FSCS”) which provides compensation to customers of financial institutions in the event that an 
institution is unable, or is likely to be unable, to pay claims against it. In order to meet its obligations to the depositors of a number 
of failed institutions the FSCS has borrowed amounts from HM Treasury on an interest only basis. It is anticipated that these 
borrowings will be repaid wholly or substantially from the realisation of the assets of the failed institutions. However, if the assets of 
these institutions are insufficient, the FSCS will recoup any shortfalls in the form of additional levies based on the level of market 
participation of individual institutions. At the date of this Annual Report it is not possible to estimate with any certainty the amount 
or timing of any such additional levies.

The FSCS raises annual levies from the banking industry to meets its management expenses and compensation costs and 
individual institutions make payments based on their level of market participation. The group has accrued £1.3 million (2009: 
£1.3 million) for its share of levies that will be raised by the FSCS, including the interest on the loan from HM Treasury, in respect of 
the levy years to 31 March 2011.

Other
The group has contingent liabilities in respect of guarantees arising in the normal course of business amounting to £1.4 million 
(2009: £10.0 million).

The company has given guarantees in respect of subsidiaries’ bank facilities of £186.6 million (2009: £204.7 million) and 
subsidiaries’ property leases of £9.1 million (2009: £9.8 million). In addition, the company has given guarantees in respect of the 
subordinated loan capital set out in note 22 on page 81.

Commitments
Memorandum items
Undrawn facilities, credit lines and other commitments to lend:
Within one year 
After more than one year 

2010 
£ million 

2009
£ million

539.8 
0.1 

328.3
1.0

539.9 

329.3

Other commitments
The group is committed to purchase minority interests in certain subsidiaries at agreed fair valuations. While not material, these 
minority interests were recognised, where appropriate, in the fair values attributed to the acquisition of the subsidiaries.

Subsidiaries had contracted capital commitments relating to capital expenditure of £0.9 million (2009: £2.5 million) and contracted 
commitments to invest in private equity funds of £3.2 million (2009: £4.3 million).

Future minimum lease payments under non-cancellable operating leases due:

Within one year 
Between one and five years 
After more than five years 

2010 

2009

Premises 
£ million 
11.3 
37.5 
16.6 

Other 
£ million 
1.1 
1.2 
0.1 

Premises 
£ million 
10.9 
36.6 
23.7 

Other
£ million
0.8
1.3
0.1

65.4 

2.4 

71.2 

2.2

U09509_pp76_pp89.indd   85

29/9/10   20:51:33

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial Statements

The Notes

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

86

29. Related party transactions
Transactions with key management
For the purposes of Related Party Disclosures (IAS 24) key management comprise the executive directors. The directors believe 
that they exclusively comprise the key management personnel of the company, with the authority and responsibility for planning, 
directing and controlling, directly or indirectly, its activities.

The remuneration of individual directors is shown in the Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration on pages 38 to 48.

Directors’ emoluments
Salaries and fees 
Benefits and allowances 
Performance related awards in respect of the current year:
Cash 
Deferred 

Severance payments 
Share-based awards 
Company pension contributions 

2010 
£ million 

2009
£ million

1.6 
0.2 

1.2 
2.0 
5.0 
– 
1.5 
0.2 

6.7 

1.6
0.2

1.7
0.7
4.2
0.8
(0.2)
0.2

5.0

During the year directors’ gains upon exercise of options, expensed to the Income Statement in previous years, totalled £0.7 million 
(2009: £2.1 million).

Key management have banking relationships with group entities which are entered into in the normal course of business. 
Amounts included in deposits by customers at 31 July 2010 attributable, in aggregate, to key management were £1.0 million 
(2009: £0.4 million).

Transactions with former director
In March 2010, the group purchased 1,250 ordinary shares of Winterflood from Mr. M.A. Hines, a former director of Close 
Brothers Group plc and Winterflood. The price paid represented fair value.

Transactions with associates
One of our associates has a banking relationship with a group entity which has been entered into in the normal course of business. 
Amounts included in deposits by customers relating to this relationship at 31 July 2010 were £11.7 million (2009: £3.0 million).

30. Pensions
The group operates defined contribution pension schemes and a defined benefits pension scheme for eligible employees. Assets 
of all schemes are held separately from those of the group. The charge to the income statement for the group pension schemes 
was £6.7 million (2009: £8.9 million) and is included within administrative expenses.

Defined benefits pension scheme
The group’s only defined benefits pension scheme (“the scheme”) was closed to new entrants in August 1996. At 31 July 2010 
this scheme had 15 (2009: 16) active members, 69 (2009: 76) deferred members and 21 (2009: 14) pensioners. The remainder of 
this note relates exclusively to the scheme.

Contributions to the scheme have been determined by an independent qualified actuary based on triennial valuations using the 
attained age method. The most recent such valuation was at 31 July 2009, when the agreed company contribution rate was 
increased from 29.5% to 31.5% of pensionable salaries per annum with effect from 1 April 2010. In addition, the group agreed to 
contribute an additional £8.4 million towards the current funding deficit, with £2.8 million paid in the current financial year and two 
further payments of £2.8 million to be paid on or before 1 August 2011 and 1 July 2012. The group estimates a contribution of 
£3.2 million to the scheme during the year to 31 July 2011.

U09509_pp76_pp89.indd   86

29/9/10   20:51:33

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

The valuation was based upon the following main actuarial assumptions:

Inflation rate 
Rate of increase in salaries 
Rate of increase in pensions in payment   
Discount rate for scheme liabilities 
Expected return on the scheme’s assets:
Equities 
Bonds 
Cash 
Mortality assumptions1:
Existing pensioners from age 65, life expectancy (years):
Men 
Women 
Non-retired members currently aged 50, life expectancy from age 65 (years):
Men 
Women 

87

2010 
% 
3.3 
2.0 
3.3 
5.4 

7.6 
4.1 
3.9 

23.4 
24.9 

25.4 
27.0 

2009
%
3.6
2.0
3.6
6.0

8.6
4.6
4.4

23.2
24.8

25.2
26.9

1 Based on standard tables SAPS S1 Light produced by the CMI Bureau of the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries, together with projected future improvements in line with the Medium 
Cohort subject to a 1.5% per annum underpin.

Expected return on equities are determined by reference to Towers Watson’s Global Investment Committee’s ten year outlook as 
at 30 June 2010 as adjusted for the inflation assumption disclosed above. Expected return on government bonds of 3.9% are 
based on the 20 year FTSE fixed interest gilts yield as at 31 July 2010. The expected return on corporate bonds of 4.9% is based 
on the iBoxx over 15 year AA corporate bond yield of 5.4% reduced by 0.5% for default risk. Expected return on cash is 
determined by reference to Towers Watson’s Global Investment Committee’s ten year outlook as at 30 June 2010 as adjusted for 
the inflation assumption disclosed above.

The surplus/(deficit) of the scheme disclosed below has been accounted for as an asset/(liability) of the group:

Fair value of scheme assets:
Equities 
Bonds 
Cash 

Total fair value of scheme assets 
Present value of scheme liabilities 
Unrecognised actuarial loss 

Surplus/(deficit) 

2010 
£ million 

2009 
£ million 

2008 
£ million 

2007 
£ million 

2006
£ million

19.7 
6.1 
3.5 

29.3 
(30.9) 
3.2 

15.9 
5.0 
2.7 

23.6 
(26.8) 
1.6 

15.2 
4.4 
3.3 

22.9 
(24.4) 
– 

19.3 
3.5 
1.1 

23.9 
(23.3) 
– 

16.9
3.4
1.3

21.6
(21.4)
–

1.6 (

1.6) 

(1.5) 

0.6 

0.2

Actuarial losses in the year not recognised by the group amount to £1.6 million (2009: loss of £1.8 million).

Movement in the present value of scheme liabilities during the year:

Carrying amount at 1 August    
Current service cost 
Interest expense 
Contributions by members 
Benefits paid 
Actuarial loss 

Carrying amount at 31 July   

2010 
£ million 
(26.8) 
(0.3) 
(1.6) 
(0.1) 
1.0 
(3.1) 

2009
£ million
(24.4)
(0.3)
(1.5)
(0.1)
1.3
(1.8)

(30.9) 

(26.8)

U09509_pp76_pp89.indd   87

29/9/10   20:51:33

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial Statements

The Notes

88

30. Pensions continued
Movement in the fair value of scheme assets during the year:

Carrying amount at 1 August    
Expected return on scheme assets 
Contributions by members 
Contributions by employer 
Benefits paid 
Actuarial gain/(loss) 

Carrying amount at 31 July  

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

2010 
£ million 
23.6 
1.8 
0.1 
3.3 
(1.0) 
1.5 

2009
£ million
22.9
1.7
0.1
2.7
(1.3)
(2.5)

29.3 

23.6

The actual return on scheme assets was an increase of £3.3 million (2009: decrease of £0.8 million).

History experience of actuarial gains and losses:

Experience gains/(losses) on scheme assets 
Experience gains/(losses) on scheme liabilities 
Impact of changes in assumptions on scheme liabilities 

2010 
£ million 
1.5 
– 
(3.1) 

2009 
£ million 
(2.5) 
1.5 
(3.3) 

2008 
£ million 
(3.6) 
(0.6) 
1.6 

2007 
£ million 
0.5 
(1.5) 
0.8 

2006
£ million
0.5
0.2
(0.3)

Total actuarial gains/(losses) on scheme liabilities 

(3.1) 

(1.8) 

1.0 

(0.7) 

(0.1)

31. Share-based awards
The following share-based awards have been granted under the 1995 Executive Share Option Scheme, Save As You Earn 
(“SAYE”) Scheme, 2004 Long Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”), 2009 Long Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”) and the discretionary annual 
performance arrangement satisfied by deferred shares. The general terms and conditions for these share-based awards are 
described on pages 43 and 44.

Movements in the number of share-based awards outstanding and their weighted average share prices are as follows:

Executive share options 

SAYE 

2004/2009 LTIP 

Deferred share awards1

At 1 August 2008 
Granted 
Exercised 
Forfeited 
Lapsed 

Weighted 
average 
exercise 
price 
699.0p 

Number 
 4,575,022 
– 
  (464,915)  455.5p 
  (222,027) 
917.7p 
  (774,732)  793.5p 

Weighted 
average 
exercise 
price 

Number 
859,578 
–  1,143,352 

Number 
638.7p  1,952,594 
428.0p  1,089,083 
(34,574) 
– 
(716,632) 

(14,021)  578.4p 
(704,428)  624.2p 
(11,451)  454.0p 

Weighted 
average 
exercise 
price 

Number 
–  1,411,418 
– 
– 
– 
– 

637,333 –
(259,854) 
– 
(82,877) 

At 31 July 2009 

 3,113,348 

696.3p  1,273,030 

459.8p  2,290,471 

–  1,706,020 –

Granted 
Exercised 
Forfeited 
Lapsed 

– 
– 
  (816,090)  566.9p 
– 
– 
  (785,811)  825.0p 

279,516 
(83,478)  523.3p 
(91,791)  490.6p 
(70,317)  575.5p 

616.0p  1,080,410 
(95,118) 
– 
(461,760) 

– 
– 
– 
– 

167,586 
(661,491) 
– 
(11,314) 

At 31 July 2010 

 1,511,447  699.2p  1,306,960  480.8p  2,814,003 

–  1,200,801 

Exercisable at: 
31 July 2010 
31 July 2009 

 1,511,447  699.2p 
700.7p 
 2,795,175 

– 
– 

– 
– 

34,128 
7,824 

– 
– 

853,421 
429,048 

Weighted
average
exercise
price
–

–
–
–

–
–
–
–

–

–
–

1 Deferred Share Awards also include Matching and Restricted awards granted to new employees on commencement of employment with the Group. During 2009, 375,304 such awards 
were made; “Granted” awards in 2009 has been adjusted to reflect this.

U09509_pp76_pp89.indd   88

29/9/10   20:51:33

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

The table below shows the weighted average market price at the date of exercise:

Executive Share Options 
SAYE 
2004 LTIP 
Deferred Share Awards 

89

2010 
765.9p 
706.4p 
748.5p 
762.6p 

2009
609.9p
652.4p
557.8p
659.9p

The range of exercise prices and weighted average remaining contractual life of awards and options outstanding are as follows:

Exercise price range 
Executive share options
Between £4 and £5 
Between £5 and £6 
Between £6 and £7 
Between £7 and £8 
Above £10 

SAYE
Between £4 and £5 
Between £5 and £6 
Between £6 and £7 
Between £8 and £9 

LTIP
Nil 

Deferred Share Awards1
Nil 

Total 

Options outstanding 
2010 

Options outstanding
2009

  Weighted 
average 
remaining 
  contractual 
life 
Years 

Number 
  outstanding 

  185,637 
  151,901 
  438,276 
  522,519 
  213,114 

  951,279 
– 
  349,725 
5,956 

2.2 
1.2 
4.2 
3.2 
0.2 

2.7 
– 
3.0 
1.8 

Weighted
average
remaining
contractual
life
Years

3.2
2.2
5.2
2.7
1.2

3.7
0.8
2.3
1.4

Number 
outstanding 

  485,538 
  365,020 
  604,786 
 1,240,490 
  417,514 

 1,070,939 
65,075 
  103,498 
33,518 

 2,814,003 

2.3 

 2,290,471 

2.5

 1,200,801 

 6,833,211 

4.0 

2.8 

 1,706,020 

 8,382,869 

4.5

3.2

1 Deferred Share Awards also include Matching and Restricted awards granted to new employees on commencement of employment with the Group. During 2009, 375,304 such awards 
were made. 

In order to satisfy a number of the above awards the company has purchased Treasury and ESOT shares. 4.8 million (2009: 
5.5 million) and 2.3 million (2009: 2.7 million) of these shares were held respectively, at the year end.

For the share-based awards granted during the year, the weighted average fair value of those options at 31 July 2010 was 565p 
(2009: 289p). The main assumptions for the valuation of these share-based awards comprised:

Exercise period 
SAYE
1 December 2012 to 31 May 2013 
1 December 2014 to 31 May 2015 

LTIP
8 November 2012 to 17 November 2013   

Deferred Share Awards
1 September 2011 to 30 September 2016 

Share price 
at issue 

Exercise 
price 

Expected 
volatility 

Expected
option life 
 in years 

Dividend 
yield 

Risk free
interest rate

770.0p 
770.0p 

616.0p 
616.0p 

46.0% 
39.0% 

3 
5 

5.3% 
5.3% 

2.4%
2.7%

730.0p 

– 

44.0% 

3 

5.3% 

1.9%

793.0p 

– 

– 

– 

– 

–

Expected volatility was determined mainly by reviewing share price volatility for the expected life of each option up to the date 
of grant.

U09509_pp76_pp89.indd   89

29/9/10   20:51:33

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial Statements

The Notes
The Notes

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

90

32. Consolidated cash flow statement reconciliation

(a) Reconciliation of operating profit before tax to net cash inflow from operating activities 
Operating profit on ordinary activities before tax 
Tax paid 
(Increase)/decrease in:
Interest receivable and prepaid expenses  
Net settlement balances and trading positions 
Net money broker loans against stock advanced 
Increase/(decrease) in:
Interest payable and accrued expenses 
Depreciation, amortisation and impairment losses on goodwill   

Net cash inflow from trading activities 
(Increase)/decrease in:
Loans and advances to banks not repayable on demand 
Loans and advances to customers 
Floating rate notes held to maturity 
Floating rate notes classified as available for sale 
Debt securities held for liquidity 
Other assets less other liabilities 
Increase/(decrease) in:
Deposits by banks 
Deposits by customers 
Loans and overdrafts from banks 
Non-recourse borrowings 

2010 
£ million 

2009
£ million

99.3 
(29.7) 

98.3
(21.0)

21.5 
(82.3) 
105.0 

(19.3) 
22.3 

116.8 

2.0 
(453.9) 
10.4 
139.3 
(0.6) 
17.0 

0.1 
195.9 
(162.1) 
– 

(20.8)
80.2
(118.5)

8.3
35.1

61.6

(1.9)
(38.9)
4.0
(3.4)
(285.0)
5.0

(250.2)
277.9
227.1
(165.0)

Net cash outflow from operating activities 

(135.1) 

(168.8)

(b) Analysis of net cash outflow in respect of the purchase of subsidiaries and associates 
Cash consideration in respect of current year purchases 
Loan stock redemptions and deferred consideration paid in respect of prior year purchases 
Net movement in cash balances 

(c) Analysis of net cash inflow in respect of the sale of subsidiaries 
Cash consideration received 
Cash and cash equivalents disposed of 

(d) Analysis of changes in financing 
Share capital (including premium) and subordinated loan capital:
Opening balance 
Shares issued for cash, net of transaction costs 

Closing balance 

(e) Analysis of cash and cash equivalents 
Cash and balances at central banks 
Loans and advances to banks repayable on demand 
Certificates of deposit 

– 
(0.4) 
– 

(17.9)
(2.1)
0.3

(0.4) 

(19.7)

– 
– 

– 

75.3
(24.2)

51.1

386.9 
1.4 

386.4
0.5

388.3 

386.9

1.7
452.7 
158.4 
194.4
672.1  1,202.2

  1,283.2  1,398.3

U09509_pp90_pp100.indd   90

29/9/10   20:51:47

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

91

Cash and cash equivalents comprise balances which have an original maturity of three months or less, together with highly liquid 
investments. The portfolio of floating rate notes classified as available for sale were reclassified during the prior period for cash 
flow presentation purposes since the majority of the portfolio had been hedged as collateral for sale and repurchase agreements 
and the market for those instruments was no longer regarded as highly liquid due to the prevailing economic environment.

33. Financial risk management
As a diversified group of financial services businesses, financial instruments are central to the group’s activities. The risks 
associated with financial instruments represent a significant component of the risks faced by the group and are analysed in more 
detail below.

The group’s financial risk management objectives are summarised within “Internal control and risk management” in the Corporate 
Governance section on pages 33 and 34. Details of the significant accounting policies and methods adopted, including the 
criteria for recognition, the basis of measurement and the basis on which income and expenses are recognised, in respect of 
each class of financial asset, financial liability and equity instrument are disclosed in note 1 to the financial statements.

(a) Classification
The tables below analyse the group’s financial assets and financial liabilities in accordance with the categories of financial 
instruments in IAS 39.

Held 

Fair value 
through 
for trading  profit or loss 
£ million 

£ million 

Held to 
maturity  Available for 
sale assets 
£ million 

assets 
£ million 

Loans and 
receivables 
£ million 

  Other financial
assets/
liabilities 
£ million 

Total
£ million

At 31 July 2010 
Assets
Cash and balances at central banks 
Settlement balances 
Loans and advances to banks  
Loans and advances to customers 
Debt securities 
Equity shares 
Loans to money brokers against stock advanced 
Derivative financial instruments  

Liabilities
Settlement balances and short positions   
Deposits by banks 
Deposits by customers 
Loans and overdrafts from banks 
Debt securities in issue 
Loans from money brokers against stock advanced   
Subordinated loan capital 
Derivative financial instruments  

– 
– 
– 
– 
54.1 
31.5 
– 
1.9 

87.5 

67.0 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
1.7 

68.7 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
5.7 
– 
– 

5.7 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

– 

– 
– 
– 
– 
9.0 
– 
– 
– 

9.0 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

– 

452.7 
– 
541.7 
– 
– 
158.5 
–  2,912.6 
672.1 
– 
86.0 
– 

901.0 
22.7 
– 
– 

– 
452.7
– 
541.7
– 
158.5
–  2,912.6
–  1,636.2
– 
59.9
– 
86.0
21.1 
23.0

923.7  4,823.6 

21.1  5,870.6

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

– 

498.1 
48.1 

– 
565.1
– 
48.1
–  3,115.5  3,115.5
–  1,178.4  1,178.4
– 
218.6
– 
32.7
– 
75.0
– 
20.5

218.6 
32.7 
75.0 
18.8 

–  5,185.2  5,253.9

U09509_pp90_pp100.indd   91

29/9/10   20:51:47

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial Statements

The Notes

92

33. Financial risk management continued

Held 

Fair value 
through 
for trading  profit or loss 
£ million 

£ million 

At 31 July 2009 
Assets
Cash and balances at central banks 
Settlement balances 
Loans and advances to banks  
Loans and advances to customers 
Debt securities 
Equity shares 
Loans to money brokers against stock advanced 
Derivative financial instruments  

– 
– 
– 
– 
37.9 
24.0 
– 
– 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
12.6 
– 
– 

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Held to 
maturity  Available for 
sale assets 
£ million 

assets 
£ million 

Loans and 
receivables 
£ million 

  Other financial
assets/
liabilities 
£ million 

Total
£ million

– 
– 
– 
– 

1.7 
– 
508.7 
– 
– 
196.5 
–  2,364.9 
19.4  1,039.7  1,202.2 
– 
25.4 
158.3 
– 
– 
– 

– 
– 
– 

1.7
– 
508.7
– 
– 
196.5
–  2,364.9
–  2,299.2
62.0
– 
158.3
– 
32.5
32.5 

61.9 

12.6 

19.4  1,065.1  4,432.3 

32.5  5,623.8

Liabilities
Settlement balances and short positions   
Deposits by banks 
Deposits by customers 
Loans and overdrafts from banks 
Debt securities in issue 
Subordinated loan capital 
Derivative financial instruments  

85.5 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

85.5 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

– 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

– 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

– 

505.2 
48.0 

590.7
– 
– 
48.0
–  2,919.6  2,919.6
–  1,340.5  1,340.5
21.4
– 
75.0
– 
21.9
– 

21.4 
75.0 
21.9 

–  4,931.6  5,017.1

(b) Valuation hierarchy
The group holds financial instruments that are measured at fair value subsequent to initial recognition. Each instrument has been 
categorised within one of three levels using a fair value hierarchy that reflects the significance of the inputs used in making the 
measurements. These levels are based on the degree to which the fair value is observable and are defined as follows:

•  Level 1 fair value measurements are those derived from quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or 

liabilities where prices are readily available and represent actual and regularly occurring market transactions on an arms length 
basis. An active market is one in which transactions occur with sufficient frequency to provide ongoing pricing information.

• L evel 2 fair value measurements are those derived from inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are 

observable for the asset or liability, either directly, as prices, or indirectly, derived from prices;

•  Level 3 fair value measurements are those derived from valuation techniques that include inputs for the asset or liability that are 

not based on observable market data (“unobservable inputs”).

U09509_pp90_pp100.indd   92

29/9/10   20:51:47

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

The group’s financial instruments which are held at fair value are analysed in the following table at the balance sheet date.

93

At 31 July 2010 
Assets
Debt securities:
Long trading positions in debt securities   
Floating rate notes classified as available for sale 
Gilts and government guaranteed debt classified as available for sale 
Equity shares:
Classified as held for trading 
Available for sale 
Valued at fair value through profit or loss   
Derivative financial instruments  

Liabilities
Short positions:
In debt securities 
In equity shares 
Derivative financial instruments  

Total 
£ million 

Level 1 
£ million 

Level 2 
£ million 

Level 3
£ million

54.1 
615.4 
285.6 

44.4 
– 
285.6 

9.7 –
615.4 
– 

31.5 
22.7 
5.7 
23.0 

31.5 
3.7 
– 
– 

– 
7.8 
– 
23.0 –

–
–

–
11.2
5.7

  1,038.0 

365.2 

655.9 

16.9

48.6 
18.4 
20.5 

43.4 
18.4 
– 

5.2 
– 
20.5 –

–
–

87.5 

61.8 

25.7 –

Instruments classified as Level 1 predominantly comprise G10 government securities and listed equity shares.

Investments classified as Level 2 predominantly comprise investment grade corporate bonds, less liquid listed equities and over 
the counter derivatives.

Investments classified as Level 3 predominantly comprise investments in private equity funds and unlisted equity shares. Level 3 
equity shares represent investments made in unlisted fixed income and property funds and private equity limited partnership 
interests. For fund investments, the most recent net asset value as calculated and reported by the fund manager is the basis of 
the valuations. Private equity partnership interests are valued using semi-annual valuations of the individual portfolio holdings held 
by each partnership, in accordance with the International Private Equity and Venture Capital Guidelines. Under these guidelines, 
new investments are generally valued at cost for the first year. Thereafter valuations are typically based on a multiple of the 
sustainable earnings before interest and tax (“EBIT”) of each holding, such multiple derived by reference to a comparable quoted 
company, sector, or recent transaction, and discounted to account for differences in size, product mix, growth prospects, level of 
gearing, and marketability. In addition, management applies a discount to these valuations to reflect the relative infrequency of the 
private equity valuations, and the illiquid nature of the portfolio. The discount is based on an average of the discounts to net asset 
value observed in a population of comparable quoted private equity funds.

Management believes that there is no reasonably possible change to the inputs used in the valuation of these positions which 
would have a material effect on the group’s income statement.

There were no significant transfers between Level 1 and 2 in the period.

Movements in financial assets categorised as Level 3 during the year were:

At 1 August 2009 
Total gains or losses recognised in the consolidated income statement1 
Total gains or losses recognised in the consolidated statement of recognised income and expense 
Purchases and issues 
Sales and settlements 

At 31 July 2010 

Total
£ million
23.6
3.8
0.2
0.2
(10.9)

16.9

1 Transfers from the consolidated statement of recognised income and expense to the income statement on impairment of available for sale level 3 equity shares are not included in the 
above table. During the year an £8.5 million transfer was made.

U09509_pp90_pp100.indd   93

29/9/10   20:51:48

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Financial Statements

The Notes

94

33. Financial risk management continued

The gains or losses recognised in the consolidated income statement relating to instruments held at the year end amounted  
to £0.6 million.

(c) Credit risk
Credit risk is the risk of loss if another party fails to perform its obligations or fails to perform them in a timely fashion and arises 
mainly from the lending and treasury activities of the Banking division.

The group’s lending activities are generally short-term in nature with low average loan size. In addition the group applies 
consistent and prudent lending criteria mitigating credit risk. The credit quality of counterparties with whom the group deposits or 
whose debt securities are held is monitored within approved limits.

Credit risk in the Securities division is limited as the businesses in that division trade in the cash markets with regulated 
counterparties on a delivery versus payment basis such that any credit exposure is limited to price movements in the underlying 
securities. Counterparty exposure and settlement failure monitoring controls are in place. 

Maximum exposure to credit risk
The maximum exposure to credit risk at 31 July 2010, before taking account of any collateral and credit risk mitigation, was:

Cash and balances at central banks 
Settlement balances 
Loans and advances to banks  
Loans and advances to customers 
Debt securities 
Equity shares 
Loans to money brokers against stock advanced 
Derivative financial instruments  
Undrawn commitments 
Guarantees 

Total maximum exposure to credit risk 

2010 
£ million 
452.7 
541.7 
158.5 

2009
£ million
1.7
508.7
196.5
  2,912.6  2,364.9
  1,636.2  2,299.2
62.0
158.3
32.5
329.3
10.9

59.9 
86.0 
23.0 
539.9 
1.4 

  6,411.9  5,964.0

Assets pledged and received as collateral
The group pledges assets primarily for repurchase agreements and securities borrowing agreements which are generally conducted 
under terms that are usual and customary to standard securitised borrowing contracts.

The group has entered into a repurchase agreement whereby floating rate notes to the value of £553.6 million (2009: £551.6 
million) have been lent in exchange for cash of £401.4 million (2009: £397.7 million) which has been included within loans and 
overdrafts from banks. The agreement matures in November 2010 and the group has agreed to enter into a similar transaction 
with a maturity of November 2011. These floating rate notes remain on the group’s balance sheet and the group retains the risk 
and rewards of ownership.

Loans to money brokers against stock advanced are the cash collateral provided to these institutions for stock borrowing by the 
group’s market-making activities. The stock borrowing to which the cash deposits relate is short-term in nature and is recorded at 
the amount payable.

The vast majority of loans and advances to customers are secured against specific assets. The security will correspond to the 
type of lending as detailed in the segmental loan book analysis on page 17 of the Business Review. Consistent and prudent 
lending criteria are applied across the whole loan book with emphasis on the quality of the security provided.

U09509_pp90_pp100.indd   94

29/9/10   20:51:48

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

95

Financial assets
Loans and advances to customers
Credit risk management and monitoring
Within the Banking division the overall credit risk appetite and policy is set by the Risk and Compliance Committee. Retail, 
Commercial and Property each use credit underwriting and monitoring measures appropriate to the diverse and specialised 
nature of their lending.

Retail is typically high volume lending with a small average loan size. Credit issues are identified early via predominantly 
automated tracking processes. Remedial actions are implemented promptly to restore customers to a performing status or 
recovery methods are applied to minimise any potential loss.

Commercial is a combination of several niche lending businesses with a diverse mix of loans in terms of assets financed, average 
loan size and loan to valuation percentage. Credit quality is assessed either on an individual loan by loan basis or a collective 
portfolio basis. This approach allows remedial actions to be implemented at the appropriate time to minimise potential losses.

Property is a portfolio of higher value, low volume lending which enables credit monitoring on a loan by loan basis. Loans are 
continually monitored to determine whether they are performing satisfactorily. Performing loans with elevated levels of credit risk 
are placed on graded watch lists depending on the perceived severity of the credit risk.

Credit risk classification
Loans and advances to customers within the Banking division, as disclosed in note 12 on pages 71 and 72, are segmented 
between the following categories for credit risk reporting: neither past due nor impaired; past due but not impaired; impaired.

Neither past due nor impaired
The following table shows the ageing of loans and advances to customers split by credit assessment method which are neither 
past due nor impaired. This demonstrates the short-term nature of the lending, with £1.6 billion having a contractual maturity of 
less than twelve months. These loans and advances reflect the application of consistent and conservative lending criteria on 
inception and the quality and level of security held. The contractual repayments are monitored to ensure that classification as 
neither past due nor impaired remains appropriate.

Within one month 
Between one and three months 
Between three months and one year 
Over one year 

2010 
Loans and advances to customers 

2009
Loans and advances to customers

Individually  Collectively 
assessed 
£ million 
173.4 
252.8 
558.8 
774.4 

assessed 
£ million 
297.4 
157.1 
155.6 
208.5 

Total 
£ million 
470.8  
409.9  
714.4  
982.9  

Individually 
assessed 
£ million 
184.8 
145.8 
100.3 
111.9 

Collectively
assessed 
£ million 
126.3 
240.8 
484.6 
638.8 

Total
£ million
311.1 
386.6 
584.9 
750.7 

818.6   1,759.4   2,578.0  

542.8    1,490.5    2,033.3 

Past due but not impaired
Loans and advances to customers are classed as past due but not impaired when the customer has failed to make a payment 
when contractually due but there is no evidence of impairment. This includes loans which are individually assessed for impairment 
but where the value of security or collateral is sufficient to meet the required repayments. This also includes loans to customers 
which are past due for technical reasons such as delays in payment processing or rescheduling of payment terms.

The following table shows the ageing of loans and advances to customers split by credit assessment method which are past due 
but for which no impairment provision has been raised.

Within one month 
Between one and three months 
Between three months and one year 
Over one year 

2010 
Loans and advances to customers 

2009
Loans and advances to customers

Individually  Collectively 
assessed 
£ million 
11.3 
0.7 
1.3 
1.8 

assessed 
£ million 
48.1 
27.5 
26.6 
5.0 

Total 
£ million 
59.4  
28.2  
27.9  
6.8  

Individually 
assessed 
£ million 
65.9 
23.6 
24.0 
1.2 

Collectively
assessed 
£ million 
11.0 
0.2 
– 
– 

Total
£ million
76.9
23.8
24.0
1.2

107.2  

15.1  

122.3  

114.7  

11.2  

125.9 

U09509_pp90_pp100.indd   95

29/9/10   20:51:48

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Financial Statements

The Notes

96

33. Financial risk management continued
Impaired 
The factors considered in determining whether assets are impaired are outlined in the accounting policies in note 1(n) on page 59.  
Impaired loans and advances to customers are analysed according to whether the impairment provisions are individually or 
collectively assessed.

Individually assessed provisions are determined on a case by case basis, taking into account the financial condition of the 
customer and an estimate of any potential recoveries and realisation of security or collateral. This methodology is applied by the 
Property lending businesses and by the invoice finance business within Commercial. 

Collectively assessed provisions are considered on a portfolio basis, to reflect the homogeneous nature of the assets.  A 
percentage of the portfolio is impaired by evaluating the ageing of missed payments combined with the historical recovery rates 
for that particular portfolio. This methodology is applied by the Retail lending businesses and the asset finance business within 
Commercial. 

The gross impaired loans are quoted without taking account of any collateral or security held, which could reduce the potential 
loss. The application of conservative loan to value ratios on inception and the emphasis on the quality of the security provided, is 
reflected in the low provision to gross impaired balance ratio (“coverage ratio”) of 29% (2009: 26%). 

The following table shows gross impaired loans and advances to customers and the provision thereon split by assessment 
method.

Gross impaired loan 
Provisions 

Net impaired loans 

2010 
Loans and advances to customers 

Individually  Collectively 
assessed 
£ million 
107.3  
(29.0) 

assessed 
£ million 
192.1 
(58.1) 

Total 
£ million 
299.4  
(87.1) 

2009
Loans and advances to customers

Individually 
assessed 
£ million 
144.8 
(39.3) 

Collectively
assessed 
£ million 
132.1  
(31.9) 

Total
£ million
276.9 
(71.2)

134.0  

78.3  

212.3  

105.5  

100.2  

 205.7 

The amount of interest income accrued on impaired loans and advances was £20.2 million (2009: £13.9 million).

Whilst collateral is reviewed on a regular basis in accordance with credit policy, this varies according to the type of lending, 
collateral involved and the status of the loan. It is therefore impracticable to estimate and aggregate current fair values for collateral.

Settlement balances
Credit risk management and monitoring
The credit risk presented by settlement balances in the Securities division is limited as such balances represent delivery versus 
payment transactions where delivery of securities occurs simultaneously with payment. The credit risk is therefore limited to the 
change in market price of a security between trade date and settlement date and not the absolute value of the trade. The 
Securities businesses are market-makers and trade with the intention of matching demand and supply for any given security. 
They trade on a principal only basis. The Securities businesses trade only with regulated counterparties including stockbrokers, 
wealth managers, institutions and hedge funds who are either approved by the FSA or equivalent in the EU or US.

Credit risk classification
Settlement balances are classed as neither past due nor impaired when the respective trades have not yet reached their 
settlement date. Settlement balances are classed as past due but not impaired when trades fail to be settled on their contractual 
settlement date. The credit risk presented by settlement balances which are past due is mitigated by the delivery versus payment 
mechanism, which requires counterparties to settle the open trade when market conditions allow, as well as by the Securities 
businesses trading only with regulated counterparties. Counterparty exposure and settlement failure monitoring controls are in 
place as part of an overall risk management framework and settlement balances past due are actively managed. 

Within one month 
Between one and three months 
Between three months and one year 
Over one year 

  Neither past 
due nor 
impaired 
486.0 
– 
– 
– 

2010 

Past due 
but not 
impaired 
47.5 
4.4 
1.6 
2.2 

Total 
533.5 
4.4 
1.6 
2.2 

  Neither past 
due nor 
impaired 
458.0 
–  
–  
–  

2009

Past due
but not
impaired 
41.7 
4.5 
3.5 
1.0 

Total
499.7
4.5
3.5
1.0

486.0  

55.7  

541.7 

458.0  

50.7  

508.7 

U09509_pp90_pp100.indd   96

29/9/10   20:51:48

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

97

Concentration risk and quality of financial assets
Loans and advances are spread across asset classes, short-term, secured and with a low average loan size in order to avoid 
concentration risk in the loan book and associated collateral.

The credit quality of the counterparties with whom the group places deposits or whose debt securities the group holds is 
monitored by the Risk and Compliance Committee within the Banking division which establishes specific limits. Whilst these 
amounts may be material, the counterparties are all regulated institutions with high credit ratings assigned by international 
credit rating agencies, and fall within the large exposure limits set by the regulatory requirements.

Credit and counterparty risk, and the measures taken to mitigate or manage these risks, are considered further within the 
Principal Risks and Uncertainties section of the Business Review on pages 22 to 26.

(d) Market risk
Market risk is the risk that arises from adverse movements in equity, bond, interest rate, foreign exchange or other traded markets 
and arises primarily in the Securities division.

Interest rate risk
The group’s exposure to interest rate fluctuations relates primarily to the returns from its capital and reserves which, as a matter of 
policy, are not hedged. The group’s policy is to match fixed and variable interest rate liabilities and assets utilising interest rate 
swaps where necessary to secure the margin on its loans and advances to customers. These interest rate swaps are disclosed in 
note 15 on page 75.

The sensitivities below are based upon reasonably possible changes in interest rate scenarios, including parallel shifts in the yield 
curve. At 31 July 2010 a 1.0% increase or a 0.5% decrease (2009: a 2.0% increase or a 0.5% decrease) in interest rates 
compared to actual rates would increase/(decrease) the group’s annual net interest income by the following amounts, prior to 
mitigation:

1.0% increase (2009: 2.0% increase) 
0.5% decrease (2009: 0.5% decrease) 

2010 
£ million 
3.1 
(1.6) 

2009
£ million
5.1
(1.3)

At 31 July 2010 a 1.0% increase or a 0.5% decrease (2009: a 2.0% increase or a 0.5% decrease) in interest rates compared to 
actual rates would increase/(decrease) the group’s equity by the following amounts, prior to mitigation:

1.0% increase (2009: 2.0% increase) 
0.5% decrease (2009: 0.5% decrease) 

2010 
£ million 
5.6 
(2.9) 

2009
£ million
3.6
(0.9)

Foreign currency risk
The group has a number of currency investments in subsidiaries and associates and has chosen not to hedge those exposures. 
These investments are predominantly in US dollars and euros. Foreign exchange differences which arise from the translation of 
these operations are recognised directly in equity.

At 31 July 2010 changes in exchange rates would increase/(decrease) the group’s equity by the following amounts:

20% strengthening of sterling against the US dollar (2009: 20% strengthening) 
20% strengthening of sterling against the euro (2009: 20% strengthening)   

2010 
£ million 
(19.4) 
(8.7) 

2009
£ million
(18.0)
(8.0)

The group would experience an equal and opposite increase in equity should sterling weaken against these currencies by the 
same percentage.

The group has additional material currency assets and liabilities primarily as a result of activities in the Banking division. These 
assets and liabilities are matched by currency, using exchange rate derivative contracts where necessary. Details of these 
contracts are disclosed in note 15 on page 75. Other potential group exposures arise from share trading settled in foreign 
currency in the Securities division, and small foreign currency equity investments. The group has policies and processes in place 
to manage foreign currency risk, and as such the impact of any reasonably expected exchange rate fluctuations would not be 
material.

U09509_pp90_pp100.indd   97

29/9/10   20:51:48

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial Statements

The Notes

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

98

33. Financial risk management continued
Market price risk
Trading financial instruments: Debt securities and equity shares
The group’s trading activities relate to Winterflood and Seydler. The following table shows the group’s trading book exposure to 
market price risk.

For the year ended 31 July 2010 
Equities
Long 
Short 

Debt securities
Long 
Short 

For the year ended 31 July 2009 
Equities
Long 
Short 

Debt securities
Long 
Short 

Highest 
exposure 
£ million 

Lowest 
exposure 
£ million 

Average 
exposure 
£ million 

Exposure
at 31 July
£ million

46.9 
24.3 

24.6 
9.0 

87.0 
94.0 

31.2 
29.8 

35.1 3
15.9 

19.2 

55.3 
60.8 

(5.5) 

1.5
18.4

13.1

54.1
48.6

5.5

Highest 
exposure 
£ million 

Lowest 
exposure 
£ million 

Average 
exposure 
£ million 

Exposure
at 31 July
£ million

51.2 
29.9 

21.2 
6.8 

124.0 
118.7 

16.6 
14.5 

34.0 
13.0 

21.0 

43.5 
44.0 

24.0
14.1

9.9

37.9
71.4

(0.5) 

(33.5)

With respect to the long and short positions on debt securities respectively, £20.7 million and £19.1 million (2009: £11.9 million 
and £11.0 million) were due to mature within one year.

The average exposure has been calculated on a daily basis. The highest and lowest exposures occurred on different dates and 
therefore a net position of these exposures does not reflect a spread of the trading book. The basis on which the trading book is 
valued each day is given in the accounting policies in note 1(p) on pages 59 and 60.

Based upon the trading book exposure given above, a hypothetical fall of 10% in market prices would result in a £1.3 million 
(2009: £1.0 million) decrease in the group’s income and net assets on the equity trading book and a £0.6 million decrease (2009: 
£3.4 million increase) on the debt securities trading book. However, the group’s trading activity is mainly a stock jobbing business 
where positions are managed throughout the day on a continuous basis. Accordingly the sensitivity referred to above is purely 
hypothetical.

Non trading financial instruments
Net gains and losses on non trading financial instruments are disclosed in note 13 on pages 72 and 73.

U09509_pp90_pp100.indd   98

29/9/10   20:51:48

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Job: 

U09509_pp90_pp100 

Operator:  r o b : set-up 
Server: 

studio 2 

Proof: 

Date: 
Set-up: 

00 : set-up 

Proof Read by:

29 September 2010 4:55 PM 
r o b : set-up only 

First Read/Revisions

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

(e) Liquidity risk
Liquidity risk is the risk of not being able to meet liabilities as they fall due and arises mainly in the Banking division.

The group has a prudent liquidity position with total available funding at 31 July 2010 of £5.6 billion (2009: £5.4 billion). This 
funding is significantly in excess of its loans and advances to customers at 31 July 2010 of £2.9 billion (2009: £2.4 billion). The 
group has a large portfolio of high quality liquid assets including cash placed on deposit with the Bank of England, short dated 
certificates of deposit and gilts. The group measures liquidity risk with a variety of measures including regular stress testing and 
regular cash flow monitoring, and reporting to both the group and divisional boards.

The following table details the contractual maturities of the group’s financial liabilities on an undiscounted cash flow basis.

99

At 31 July 2010 
Settlement balances 
Deposits by banks 
Deposits by customers 
Loans and overdrafts from banks 
Debt securities in issue 
Loans from money brokers against stock advanced   
Subordinated loan capital 
Derivative financial instruments  
Off balance sheet commitments 

On 
demand 
£ million 

– 
23.0 
782.4 
13.9 
– 
32.7 
2.3 
– 
27.9 

In more 
than three 

In more 
than six 
In less  months but  months but 
than three  not more than  not more than 
one year 
six months 
£ million 
£ million 

months 
£ million 

498.1 
25.1 
789.3 
498.7 
6.5 
– 
0.6 
169.6 
0.1 

– 
– 
661.0 
627.3 
– 
– 
– 
237.6 
– 

– 
– 
682.3 
0.2 
6.5 
– 
2.8 
7.4 
– 

In more
than one
year but not 
more than 
five years 
£ million 

– 
– 
256.7 
50.1 
79.3 
– 
53.8 
28.0 
– 

In more
than five
 years 
£ million 

Total
£ million

– 
– 

498.1
48.1
3.0  3,174.7
–  1,190.2
311.8
32.7
123.5
442.8
28.0

219.5 
– 
64.0 
0.2 
– 

Total 

882.2  1,988.0  1,525.9 

699.2 

467.9 

286.7  5,849.9

At 31 July 2009 
Settlement balances 
Deposits by banks 
Deposits by customers 
Loans and overdrafts from banks 
Debt securities in issue 
Subordinated loan capital 
Derivative financial instruments  
Off balance sheet commitments 

On 
demand 
£ million 

– 
17.2 
769.1 
26.7 
– 
2.3 
– 
– 

In more 
than three 

In more 
than six 
In less  months but  months but 
than three  not more than  not more than 
one year 
six months 
£ million 
£ million 

months 
£ million 

In more
than one
year but not 
more than 
five years 
£ million 

505.2 
19.6 
924.8 
3.6 
– 
0.6 
106.0 
0.9 

– 
2.5 
310.1 
24.1 
0.1 
– 
6.0 
0.6 

– 
8.3 
53.5 

– 
0.6 
935.5 
204.4  1,118.2 
0.8 
22.5 
6.0 
9.2 

0.3 
2.8 
8.9 
2.0 

In more
than five
 years 
£ million 

Total
£ million

505.2
– 
48.2
– 
–  2,993.0
–  1,377.0
22.9
157.3
126.9
15.0

21.7 
129.1 
– 
2.3 

Total 

815.3  1,560.7 

343.4 

280.2  2,092.8 

153.1  5,245.5

34. Post balance sheet event
Since the year end the group has acquired 100% of Chartwell Group Limited, an IFA with over £650 million of client assets, for 
consideration of approximately £17 million.

U09509_pp90_pp100.indd   99

29/9/10   20:51:49

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial Statements

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

Investor Relations

100

Financial calendar (provisional)
Annual General Meeting 
First quarter Interim Management Statement 
Final dividend payment 
Half year end 
Interim Results 
Interim dividend payment 
Third quarter Interim Management Statement 
Pre close trading statement 
Financial year end 
Preliminary Results 

18 November 2010
18 November 2010
19 November 2010
31 January 2011
March 2011
April 2011
May 2011
July 2011
31 July 2011
September 2011

The financial calendar is updated on a regular basis throughout the year. Please refer to our website www.closebrothers.co.uk for 
up to date details.

Shareholder analysis
The number of shareholders analysed by the quantity of shares they held at 31 July 2010 was:

Up to 500 shares

501 – 1,000

1,001 – 2,000

2,001 – 5,000

1,618

1,144

816

535

5,001 – 10,000

140

10,001 – 50,000

Over 50,000

207

231

Cautionary Statement

Certain statements included or incorporated by reference within this report may constitute “forward-looking statements” in 
respect of the group’s operations, performance, prospects and/or financial condition. By their nature, forward looking statements 
involve a number of risks, uncertainties and assumptions and actual results or events may differ materially from those expressed 
or implied by those statements. Accordingly, no assurance can be given that any particular expectation will be met and reliance 
should not be placed on any forward-looking statement. Additionally, forward-looking statements regarding past trends or 
activities should not be taken as a representation that such trends or activities will continue in the future. No responsibility or 
obligation is accepted to update or revise any forward-looking statement resulting from new information, future events or 
otherwise. Nothing in this report should be construed as a profit forecast. This report does not constitute or form part of any offer 
or invitation to sell, or any solicitation of any offer to purchase any shares or other securities in the company, nor shall it or any part 
of it or the fact of its distribution form the basis of, or be relied on in connection with, any contract or commitment or investment 
decisions relating thereto, nor does it constitute a recommendation regarding the shares and other securities of the company. 
Past performance cannot be relied upon as a guide to future performance and persons needing advice should consult an 
independent financial adviser. Statements in this report reflect the knowledge and information available at the time of its 
preparation. Liability arising from anything in this report shall be governed by English Law. Nothing in this report shall exclude any 
liability under applicable laws that cannot be excluded in accordance with such laws.

U09509_pp90_pp100.indd   100

29/9/10   20:51:49

Close Brothers is a 
Banking, Securities and 
Asset Management 
group with a long and 
successful track record.

Corporate Overview
01  Group Results
02   Chairman’s and Chief 
Executive’s Statement

06  Our Business
08  Board of Directors
10  Executive Committee

Business Review
11  Overview
16  Banking
18  Securities
20  Asset Management
22   Principal Risks and 

Uncertainties

Governance
27  Report of the Directors
29  Corporate Governance
36  Corporate Responsibility
38   Report of the Board on 
Directors’ Remuneration

Financial Statements
49  Report of the Auditors
50   Consolidated Income Statement
51   Consolidated Statement  
of Recognised Income  
and Expense

52  Consolidated Balance Sheet
53   Consolidated Statement of  

Changes in Equity

54   Consolidated Cash Flow 

Statement

55  Company Balance Sheet
56  The Notes
 100  Investor Relations
 100  Cautionary Statement

Front cover: Close Brothers, 10 Crown Place head office in London (right)

Auditors
Deloitte LLP

Solicitors
Slaughter and May

Corporate brokers
J.P. Morgan Cazenove
UBS Investment Banking

Registrars
Capita Registrars
Northern House
Woodsome Park
Fenay Bridge
Huddersfield HD8 0GA
Shareholder helpline: 0871 664 0300 
Calls cost 10p per minute plus network charges,
lines are open 8.30am to 5.30pm Monday to Friday
Fax: 01484 606484
Website: www.capitaregistrars.com

Registered office
Close Brothers Group plc
10 Crown Place
London EC2A 4FT
Telephone: +44 (0)20 7655 3100
Fax: +44 (0)20 7655 8967
E-mail: enquiries@cbgplc.com
Company No. 520241
Website: www.closebrothers.co.uk

Designed by Emperor Design Consultants Ltd

Typeset and printed by B

U09509_cover.indd   2

29/9/10   20:47:16

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2010

l

C
o
s
e
B
r
o
t
h
e
r
s
G
r
o
u
p
p
c
A
n
n
u
a

l

l

R
e
p
o
r
t
2
0
1
0

Close Brothers Group plc
10 Crown Place
London EC2A 4FT
Tel: +44 (0)20 7655 3100
Fax: +44 (0)20 7655 8967

www.closebrothers.co.uk

U09509_cover.indd   1

29/9/10   20:47:15